manualshive.com logo in svg

Cisco MGX 8850, Справочник по командам

Cisco MGX 8850 - высокопроизводительный мультиплексор, обеспечивающий широкий спектр сетевых услуг. Для более глубокого понимания функционала устройства, рекомендуется скачать бесплатный "Command Reference Manual" с официального сайта производителя. manualshive.com - ваш источник документации для Cisco MGX 8850.

Поделиться
Скачать
background image

3-8

Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference

Release 2.0, Part Number 78-10467-04 Rev C0, October 2001

Chapter 3

Equipment and Resource Provisioning

addcontroller

addcontroller

Add Controller

Identifies a network control protocol to the Virtual Switch Interface (VSI) that runs on the node. If you 
do not identify a network control protocol (or simply controller), the switch does not use it. Adding a 
controller through the addcontroller command requires the following information:

•

The type of controller, such as PNNI

•

Where the controller runs—internally, on the local PXM45, or externally, through a virtual 
connection

Note

Currently, the only supported controller is PNNI, and it runs only as an internal controller.

Use addcontroller before you create resource partitions the service modules. For information on 
resource partitions, see the description of addpart (or addrscprtn).

If you discover an error in your controller specification after you add it, delete the controller by 
executing delcontroller then add it again.

Cards on Which This Command Runs

PXM45

Syntax

The syntax differs for internal and external controllers:

Internal controller:

addcontroller <cntrlrId> i <cntrlrType> <lslot> cntrlrName]

External controller:

addcontroller <cntrlrId> x<cntrlrType> <lslot> <bay> <line> <vpi> <vci> [cntrlrName]

Syntax Description for Internal Controller

cntrlrId

A number in the range 1–3 that identifies a network controller. The numbers are 
reserved, as follows:

1 = PAR (Portable AutoRoute)—currently not used

2 = PNNI

3 = LSC (Label Switch Controller, also known as MPLS for Multiprotocol Label 
Switch Controller)—currently not used

Note

For an internal controller, the controller ID (cntrlrId) must be the same as 
the controller type (cntrlrType). Currently, the only available controller is 
PNNI, and only internal controllers are supported. Therefore, the only 
valid argument string for addcontroller is “2 i 2.” See the example.

i

Keyword indicating that this controller is internal.

Содержание MGX 8850

Страница 1: ...Tasman Drive San Jose CA 95134 1706 USA http www cisco com Tel 408 526 4000 800 553 NETS 6387 Fax 408 526 4100 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 October 2001 Customer Order Number DOC 10467 Text Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 ...

Страница 2: ...AGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AAccessPath AtmDirector Browse with Me CCIP CCSI CD PAC CiscoLink the Cisco Powered Network logo Cisco Systems Networking Academy the Cisco Systems Networking Academy logo Fast Step Follow Me Browsing FormShare FrameShare GigaStack IGX Internet Quot...

Страница 3: ...ee product features the most Document Information Document Title Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Part Number DOC 7810467 S W Release if applicable Release 2 0 On a scale of 1 5 5 being the best please let us know how we rate in the following areas Please comment on our lowest scores Mailing Information Company Name Date Contact Name Job Title Mailing Address City State Province ZIP...

Страница 4: ... S S M A I L P E R M I T N O 4 6 3 1 S A N J O S E C A POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE ATTN DOCUMENT RESOURCE CONNECTION CISCO SYSTEMS INC 170 WEST TASMAN DRIVE SAN JOSE CA 95134 9883 NO POSTAGE NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES ...

Страница 5: ...ved Commands xxvi C H A P T E R 1 Command Line Interface Overview 1 1 The Role of the CLI 1 1 Command Line Prompt 1 2 Command Syntax 1 2 Notation 1 3 Position Dependent and Keyword Driven Parameters 1 3 Command Entry 1 3 Contents of a Command Description 1 3 Identifying the AXSM Models 1 4 Connection Capacities of the AXSM 1 5 Identifying Physical and Logical Elements 1 5 AXSM Format 1 5 PNNI Form...

Страница 6: ...on Dependent and Keyword Driven Parameters 2 1 Command Entry 2 2 Identifying the AXSM Models 2 2 Connection Capacities of the AXSM 2 2 Identifying Physical and Logical Elements 2 3 AXSM Format 2 3 PNNI Format 2 4 abortrev 2 6 addtrapmgr 2 9 adduser 2 10 bootChange 2 12 burnboot 2 14 clidbxlevel 2 15 clrallcnf 2 16 clrcnf 2 17 cnfclkparms 2 19 cnfclksrc 2 20 cnfdate 2 24 cnfname 2 25 cnfndparms 2 2...

Страница 7: ...dspcd 2 46 dspcds 2 49 dspclksrcs 2 51 dspdisk 2 55 dspipconntask 2 56 dspipif 2 57 dspipifcache 2 59 dspndparms 2 60 dsppvcif 2 61 dsprevs 2 63 dspserialif 2 66 dspsnmp 2 67 dsptrapmgr 2 68 dspusers 2 69 dspversion 2 70 ipifconfig 2 72 loadrev 2 75 pvcifconfig 2 79 resetsys 2 81 restoreallcnf 2 82 runrev 2 83 routeShow 2 86 routestatShow 2 87 saveallcnf 2 88 setipconndebug 2 90 setrev 2 91 svcifc...

Страница 8: ... AXSM Models 3 2 Connection Capacities of the AXSM 3 2 Identifying Physical and Logical Elements 3 3 AXSM Format 3 3 PNNI Format 3 4 addapsln 3 6 addcontroller 3 8 addfdr 3 11 addpart 3 12 addport 3 15 addred 3 18 addrscprtn 3 19 clrbecnt 3 21 clrfdrstat 3 22 cnfapsln 3 23 cnfatmln 3 25 cnfcdsct 3 27 cnfln 3 29 cnfpart 3 32 cnfport 3 34 cnfrscprtn 3 36 delapsln 3 38 delcontroller 3 39 delfdr 3 40 ...

Страница 9: ...controllers 3 71 dspfdr 3 72 dspfdrs 3 73 dspfdrstat 3 74 dspln 3 75 dsplns 3 77 dspload 3 79 dsppart 3 81 dspparts 3 83 dspport 3 84 dspports 3 86 dspportsct 3 87 dspred 3 94 dsprscprtn 3 95 dsprscprtns 3 97 dspsct 3 98 dsptotals 3 102 switchapsln 3 103 switchredcd 3 104 uplmi 3 105 upln 3 106 upport 3 107 C H A P T E R 4 ILMI Commands 4 1 Position Dependent and Keyword Driven Parameters 4 1 Comm...

Страница 10: ...7 dspilmiaddr 4 18 dspilmicnt 4 19 dspilmis 4 20 dsppnilmi 4 21 dspprfx 4 23 upilmi 4 24 C H A P T E R 5 PNNI Commands 5 1 PNNI Addressing 5 2 Position Dependent and Keyword Driven Parameters 5 3 Command Entry 5 3 Identifying the AXSM Models 5 3 Identifying Physical and Logical Elements 5 4 AXSM Format 5 4 PNNI Format 5 5 addpnni node 5 6 addpnni summary addr 5 12 aesa_ping 5 15 cnfpnni election 5...

Страница 11: ... 5 64 dsppnni intf 5 66 dsppnni link 5 69 dsppnni link selection 5 71 dsppnni mtu 5 73 dsppnni neighbor 5 74 dsppnni node 5 77 dsppnni node list 5 81 dsppnni path 5 87 dsppnni pkttrace 5 92 dsppnni ptse 5 94 dsppnni reachable addr 5 104 dsppnni routing policy 5 108 dsppnni scope map 5 112 dsppnni spoke 5 113 dsppnni summary addr 5 115 dsppnni svcc rcc 5 117 dsppnni svcc rcc timer 5 119 dsppnni tim...

Страница 12: ...rt 6 12 aesa_ping 6 14 clrpnconstats 6 16 clrsigstats 6 18 clrsscopstats 6 20 cnfe164justify 6 21 cnfenhiisp 6 22 cnffdonaal5 6 23 cnffltset 6 24 cnfintfcongth 6 26 cnfnodalcongth 6 28 cnfpnctlvc 6 31 cnfpnportacc 6 33 cnfpnportcac 6 34 cnfpnportcc 6 36 cnfpnportloscallrel 6 38 cnfpnportrange 6 39 cnfpnportsig 6 41 cnfsig 6 45 cnfsigdiag 6 48 cnfspvcprfx 6 51 cnfsscop 6 53 cnftrapip 6 55 deladdr 6...

Страница 13: ...ongflags 6 75 dspnodalcongth 6 76 dsppingatmaddr 6 78 dsppncon 6 79 dsppncons 6 81 dsppnconstats 6 83 dsppnctlvc 6 86 dsppnport 6 87 dsppnportcac 6 89 dsppnportcc 6 90 dsppnportidmaps 6 91 dsppnportloscallrel 6 92 dsppnportrange 6 93 dsppnportrsrc 6 94 dsppnports 6 95 dsppnportsig 6 99 dsppnsysaddr 6 100 dspsig 6 103 dspsigdiag 6 104 dspsigparm 6 106 dspsigstats 6 107 dspspvcprfx 6 110 dspsscop 6 ...

Страница 14: ...e AXSM 7 2 Identifying Physical and Logical Elements 7 3 AXSM Format 7 3 PNNI Format 7 4 addcon 7 6 clrpncon 7 15 clrpnconstats 7 17 cnfabr 7 18 cnfabrtparmdft 7 20 cnfcdvtdft 7 22 cnfcon 7 24 cnfconsegep 7 28 cnfmbsdft 7 29 cnfoamsegep 7 30 delcon 7 31 delcons 7 32 delconsegep 7 33 dncon 7 34 dspabrtparmdft 7 35 dspcdvtdft 7 36 dspcon 7 37 dspconinfo 7 41 dspcons 7 42 dspconsegep 7 46 dspmbsdft 7...

Страница 15: ...rmat 8 4 cnfpnportloscallrel 8 5 cnfrrtparm 8 6 cnfrteopt 8 8 cnfrteoptthld 8 11 dspload 8 12 dsppnportloscallrel 8 15 dsprrtparm 8 16 dsprteoptcnf 8 17 dsprteoptstat 8 18 optrte 8 19 routeShow 8 21 routestatShow 8 22 rrtcon 8 23 C H A P T E R 9 Troubleshooting Commands 9 1 Position Dependent and Keyword Driven Parameters 9 1 Command Entry 9 1 Identifying the AXSM Models 9 2 Identifying Physical a...

Страница 16: ...1 clrportcnt 9 22 clrportcnts 9 23 clrxbaralm 9 24 clrxbarerrcnt 9 25 cnfalm 9 26 cnfdiag 9 31 cnfdiagall 9 35 cnfpnportloscallrel 9 37 cnfxbarerrthresh 9 38 cnfxbarmgmt 9 40 conntrace 9 42 copycons 9 43 dbgcon 9 45 delchanloop 9 46 dellnloop 9 47 dncon 9 48 dnln 9 49 dnport 9 50 dspalm 9 51 dspalmcnf 9 53 dspalmcnt 9 55 dspalms 9 57 dspbecnt 9 59 dspcd 9 60 dspcdalms 9 63 dspcdbucketcnt 9 66 dspc...

Страница 17: ... dbg 9 94 dspcontrollers 9 95 dspdiagcnf 9 96 dspdiagerr 9 98 dspdiagstat 9 100 dspdiagstatus 9 101 dspenvalms 9 103 dsperr 9 106 dsperrhist 9 108 dspilmicnt 9 110 dspln 9 111 dsplncnt 9 113 dsplns 9 115 dsplog 9 117 dsplogs 9 120 dspndalms 9 121 dsppnportloscallrel 9 124 dspportcnt 9 125 dspprfhist 9 127 dspswalm 9 128 dsptrapmgr 9 130 dspxbar 9 131 dspxbaralm 9 134 dspxbarerrcnt 9 136 dspxbarerr...

Страница 18: ...ease 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 offdiagstat 9 144 ondiagstat 9 145 pathtraceie 9 146 pathtracenode 9 147 pathtraceport 9 148 resetcd 9 150 resetsys 9 151 switchcc 9 152 tstconseg 9 153 tstdelay 9 155 upcon 9 158 upln 9 159 upport 9 160 I N D E X ...

Страница 19: ... Identifier 5 12 Figure 5 6 Cisco Factory shipped Defaults for PNNI Peer Group Identifier PNNI Summary Address ATM Address and PNNI Node Identifier 5 31 Figure 5 7 Cisco Factory shipped Defaults for PNNI Peer Group Identifier PNNI Summary Address ATM Address and PNNI Node Identifier 5 78 Figure 5 8 Multi Peer Group 5 83 Figure 5 9 A List of Nodes in a Multi Peer Group 5 84 Figure 6 1 An SPVC With ...

Страница 20: ...Figures xviii Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 ...

Страница 21: ...Upgrade From 2 x to 2 y 2 6 Table 2 6 Redundant Pair Upgrade From 2 x to 2 y 2 7 Table 2 7 Single Card Upgrade From 2 x to 2 y 2 39 Table 2 8 Redundant Pair Upgrade From 2 x to 2 y 2 40 Table 2 9 Reasons for Change of Clock State 2 52 Table 2 10 Single Card Upgrade From 2 x to 2 y 2 75 Table 2 11 Redundant Pair Upgrade From 2 x to 2 y 2 76 Table 2 12 Single Card Upgrade From 2 x to 2 y 2 83 Table ...

Страница 22: ...e 7 4 Mapping PNNI Port ID to AXSM Elements 7 4 Table 7 5 Default Traffic Parameters for AXSM 7 7 Table 7 6 Ranges for PCR SCR and MCR for Each Line Type 7 8 Table 8 1 Valid Line Numbers and Number of Bays for AXSM Card Types 8 2 Table 8 2 Maximum Connections by Connection Type and Front Card 8 2 Table 8 3 Maximum Connections on Back Cards and Lines 8 3 Table 8 4 Mapping PNNI Port ID to AXSM Eleme...

Страница 23: ...sentative or call customer service The CD ROM package is available as a single package or as an annual subscription You can also access Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at http www cisco com http www china cisco com or http www europe cisco com If you are reading Cisco product documentation on the World Wide Web you can submit comments electronically Click Feedback in the toolbar select D...

Страница 24: ...e controllers Chapter 4 ILMI Commands Describes commands that add modify display status and create statistics for ILMI Chapter 5 PNNI Commands Describes commands to add delete configure display status and create statistics for the PNNI routing protocol Chapter 6 Logical Node Port and Signaling Commands Describes commands to specify node level and PNNI logical port parameters Chapter 7 SPVC and SVC...

Страница 25: ...the MGX 8850 ATM edge switch 1 CLI command line interface Cisco MGX 8850 Switch Software Configuration Guide Release 2 DOC 7810352 Describes how to configure the MGX 8850 to operate as an ATM core switch or as an ATM edge switch Cisco PXM SNMP Reference Release 2 DOC 7811276 Provides information on all supported MIB2 objects support restrictions traps and alarms for the PXM45 Module 2 MIB Manageme...

Страница 26: ... are in square brackets Note Means reader take note Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in this manual Caution Means reader be careful In this situation you might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data Table 3 Cisco WAN Manager Release 10 Related Documentation Documentation Description Cisco WAN Manager Installation for Solaris Rel...

Страница 27: ...removed in this release New Commands These commands are new to release 2 abortallsaves actaudit addlnloop addlpback ccc checkflash clralm clralmcnt clrbecnt clrchancnts clrcnf clrloginmsg clrportcnts clrqosdefault cnfcbclk cnfloginmsg cnfpasswd cnfpswdreset or cnfpasswdreset conntrace core dbgcon dellpback delpnni node delpnni summary addr delsesn dspactaudit dspapsbkplane dspbecnt dspbkpl dspcbcl...

Страница 28: ...oftswitch switchback telnet uplmi users Changed Commands The commands that changed in this release by being executed on a different board by requiring different parameters or by having different keywords are not listed here See individual commands for details The following commands were replaced in this release dspspvclog was renamed dspcons dbg passwd was renamed cnfpasswd dsppwd was renamed dspp...

Страница 29: ... Command Changes addslave obsolete clrxbaralms cnfifip obsolete cnfxbaradmin obsolete delln removed from AXSM dspifip obsolete dspnddebug dspshelfalm obsolete pre empted by dspenvalms dspslotalms dspxbaralms removed from 2 0 the singular command dspxbaralm remains formatdisk mkfs offdiagcstat shutdisk syncdisk ...

Страница 30: ...xxviii Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Command Changes ...

Страница 31: ...I During normal operation the tools for configuring monitoring and controlling a switch are the CiscoView application for equipment management and the Cisco WAN Manager application for connection management However during initial switch installation troubleshooting or where low level control is important the command line interface CLI provides the best access to the switch Each PXM45 and service m...

Страница 32: ...h the command can execute A card in the initialized state i is still loading application modules A card in the active a state either is fully configured and ready to carry out its function or is already performing its function with live traffic Typically a card goes into the standby s state when it first powers up and boots or when you execute a command that puts it in the standby state For exampl...

Страница 33: ...or succeeding position dependent parameters must appear as they do in the command syntax description In the following syntax example the command is to delete more than one connection at a time The mandatory position dependent connection identifier consist of a logical port ifNum and the VPI and VCI of the first connection to delete After the connection identifier the line shows two optional keywor...

Страница 34: ... of commands add delete configure and display or other commands that could complement the command An Example section shows one or more examples of command usage The text for this section describes the intention of the command and may also describe an outcome A representation of screen output usually appears Occasionally supplemental commands and screen samples appear in support of the example Iden...

Страница 35: ...texts and how they correspond to each other The parallel actions of configuring or displaying logical elements on different cards is broadly illustrated in the Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Software Configuration Guide Release 2 0 Apart from the way PNNI and the lower levels of logic identify the same element the sequence of commands also needs explanation When you configure logical ports for just...

Страница 36: ...n associated with each element inside the square brackets The elements of the physical port ID are as follows The shelf is always 1 for the current product and so is usually omitted The slot number of the front card Subslot is the number of the bay where the back card resides This number is 1 or 2 Port is the physical line Subport corresponds to the resource partition on the AXSM For a UNI or NNI ...

Страница 37: ...h command Table 1 5 Commands Command Description or Help Help list of commands available on the card bye End current user session cc Change card cd Change directory clrscrn Clear terminal screen cmdhistory List last 10 commands entered copy Copy one file to another on the hard drive cp Copy one file to another on the hard drive del Delete a file on the hard drive exit Exit the current user session...

Страница 38: ...n that string If you follow the with the complete name of one command the output simply states whether that command is available If you can enter two parameter strings help provides information for each of the two strings separately not a single two part string Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax command Syntax Description Related Commands help Attributes Examples View all commands ...

Страница 39: ...ober 2001 Chapter 1 Command Line Interface Overview bye bye Bye Exit the current CLI session Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax bye Related Commands logout exit Attributes Exit the current CLI shell MGX8850 8 PXM a bye session ended Log log State active standby init Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 40: ...Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax cc slot number Syntax Description Related Commands None Attributes Change from the command line of the AXSM in slot 12 to the command line of the PXM45 in slot 8 MGX8850 12 AXSM a cc 8 session redirected MGX8850 8 PXM a If the slot is empty or the card is unreachable the system displays an applicable message slot number The number of the destinati...

Страница 41: ...ax cd directory_name Syntax Description Related Commands ls pwd rename rm rmdir copy Attributes Change directory to FW then check the result by executing pwd MGX8850 7 PXM a cd FW MGX8850 7 PXM a Verify the current directory by using the pwd command MGX8850 7 PXM a pwd C FW Go back to Root directory then check the result by executing pwd MGX8850 7 PXM a cd MGX8850 7 PXM a pwd C directory_name Name...

Страница 42: ... Clear Screen The clrscrn command clears the control terminal screen After this command runs only the current command line prompt appears on the screen Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax clrscrn Related Commands None Attributes Example Clear the screen MGX8850 11 AXSM a clrscrn MGX8850 11 AXSM a Log no log State active standby init Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 43: ...ch This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax cmdhistory Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands history Attributes Example Display the previous commands executed on the PXM45 Repeat dspcd MGX8850 7 PXM a cmdhistory Size of cmdHistory is currently 10 line s 1 cmdhistory 2 cd 3 cd 4 pwd 5 cd 6 dspcd 7 clrscrn 8 9 q 10 cmdhistory MGX8850 7 PXM a 6 dspcd MGX8850 System Rev 02 00...

Страница 44: ...m3 PXM HardDiskDrive State Active Active Active Serial Number SAK0401006C SHELFMGMGRP SAK03520058 Prim SW Rev 2 0 1 D Sec SW Rev 2 0 1 D Cur SW Rev 2 0 1 D Boot FW Rev 2 0 233 A1 800 level Rev 16 B0 05 Orderable Part 800 06147 01 800 03145 07 800 05052 03 CLEI Code 0000000000 CISCO__INC 0000000000 Reset Reason On Reset From Shell Card Alarm NONE Failed Reason None Miscellaneous Information ...

Страница 45: ...le name destination file name Syntax Description Related Commands cp cd ls rm pwd rename Attributes Example Create a new firmware file without the image s suffix by copying the file named pxm_1 0 00Ef fw to pxm_1 0 00 fw MGX8850 8 PXM a copy pxm_1 0 00Ef fw pxm_1 0 00 fw MGX8850 8 PXM a source file name The name of the file you intend to copy destination file name The name of the new file resultin...

Страница 46: ... source file name destination file name Syntax Description Related Commands cd ls rm pwd rename Attributes Example Create a new firmware file without the image s suffix by copying the file named pxm_1 0 00Ef fw to pxm_1 0 00 fw MGX8850 8 PXM a cp pxm_1 0 00Ef fw pxm_1 0 00 fw source file name The name of the file you intend to copy destination file name The name of the new file resulting from cp o...

Страница 47: ...Command Line Interface Overview del del Delete Use del to remove a file or directory from the PXM45 hard drive Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax del path_name Syntax Description Related Commands None Attributes path_name Name of an existing file or directory Log log State active standby init Privilege GROUP1 ...

Страница 48: ... from User Session Use exit to exit the current user session and log out To start another session you must log in by using telnet for example Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax exit Related Commands bye logout Attributes Example Exit from the current user session MGX8850 8 PXM a exit session ended Log log State active standby init Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 49: ...p command is case sensitive Its behavior with or without parameters is With no parameter string it lists all commands on the card With part of a command name it lists all commands that contain that string With the entire command name the output shows only whether the command is available Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax Help string Related Commands Attributes Log no log State act...

Страница 50: ... Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax history Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands cmdhistory Attributes Example Display the last 10 commands executed on the PXM45 Repeat the previous execution of dspdate MGX8850 7 PXM a dspdate Sep 09 2000 16 37 37 GMT MGX8850 7 PXM a history Size of cmdHistory is currently 10 line s 1 q 2 help dsp 3 help dspdate 4 q ...

Страница 51: ...ogout logout Log Out The logout command lets you end the current user session Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax logout Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands bye exit Attributes Example Log out of the current CLI shell MGX8850 8 PXM a logout session ended Log log State active standby init Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 52: ...mand Runs PXM45 Syntax ls dir Syntax Description You can specify an optional directory or path to list Related Commands cd pwd rename copy Attributes Examples List all the files at the highest level of the disk MGX8850 7 PXM a ls SM FW DIAG STATS TMP CNF RPM LOG clrDB upgrade state config sys DB In the file system total space 819200 K bytes free space 700583 K bytes Change to the SCT directory Lis...

Страница 53: ...r 2001 Chapter 1 Command Line Interface Overview ls AXSM In the file system total space 819200 K bytes free space 660582 K bytes MGX8850 7 PXM a ls AXSM AXSM_SCT CARD 2 AXSM_SCT CARD 3 AXSM_SCT PORT 2 AXSM_SCT PORT 3 In the file system total space 819200 K bytes free space 660582 K bytes MGX8850 7 PXM a ...

Страница 54: ...ed Commands None Attributes Example Ping IP address 172 29 23 148 MGX8850 7 PXM a ping 172 29 23 148 PING 172 29 23 148 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 172 29 23 148 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 172 29 23 148 icmp_seq 1 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 172 29 23 148 icmp_seq 2 time 0 ms 172 29 23 148 PING Statistics 3 packets transmitted 3 packets received 0 packet loss round trip ms min avg max 0 0 0 IP...

Страница 55: ...orking Directory Use pwd to identify the current working directory on the PXM45 Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax pwd Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands cd rmdir rm ls copy Attributes Example Identify the present working directory MGX8850 7 PXM a pwd C MGX8850 7 PXM a Log no log State active standby init Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 56: ... current card Idle time in hours minutes and seconds Current username IP address of the device that accessed the card not the IP address of the card or node Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax who Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands adduser deluser whoami Attributes Example Display information about the user currently logged into the card MGX8850 7 P...

Страница 57: ...ciated terminal port of the current user Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax whoami Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands adduser deluser who Attributes Example Display information about the user of the current terminal session MGX8850 7 PXM a whoami User ID cisco Access Level CISCO_GP Terminal Port telnet 01 MGX8850 7 PXM a Log no log State active sta...

Страница 58: ...1 28 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 1 Command Line Interface Overview whoami ...

Страница 59: ...position dependent parameters you must type parameters in the order they appear in the syntax description or on line help To create a logical port for example the position dependent syntax is addport ifNum bay line guaranteedRate maxrate sctID ifType vpi For a keyword driven parameter a keyword must precede the value The keyword is preceded by a dash and followed by the parameter timeout secs for ...

Страница 60: ...on the AXSM 16 155 and AXSM 16 T3E3 16 as the name indicates The MGX 8850 node uses the concept of a bay The bay refers to the upper or lower location of a single height card The switch has a double height card cage so a single height back card necessarily occupies either an upper or lower position The T3 E3 OC 3 and OC 12 versions of the AXSM can have two back cards one in bay 1 upper location of...

Страница 61: ... way PNNI and the lower levels of logic identify the same element the sequence of commands also needs explanation When you configure logical ports for just one example you must complete certain tasks on the AXSM CLI before or after related PNNI tasks For certain commands this manual lists prerequisite commands or tasks For more details on the sequence of tasks refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Routing S...

Страница 62: ...and so is usually omitted The slot number of the front card Subslot is the number of the bay where the back card resides This number is 1 or 2 Port is the physical line Subport corresponds to the resource partition on the AXSM For a UNI or NNI this resource partition is the same number as the logical port number ifNum on the AXSM For a virtual network to network interface VNNI the number does not ...

Страница 63: ...0 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 2 Shelf Management Commands Identifying Physical and Logical Elements Bay 2 Line 1 Logical interface 1 or logical port 1 ...

Страница 64: ...ersion For a redundant pair of cards the standby becomes the active card then starts running the new version 3 If an unacceptable problem occurs the optional abortrev command restores the previous version of firmware as well as the previous database contents 4 commitrev declares the new primary version to be acceptable and removes the old primary from main memory but not the hard disk A graceful u...

Страница 65: ... restored database has no record of the topology change Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax abortrev slot revision Syntax Description Related Commands loadrev commitrev runrev setrev Attributes Table 2 6 Redundant Pair Upgrade From 2 x to 2 y Firmware status Before upgrade After loadrev After runrev After commitrev Active Standby Active Standby Standby Active Standby Active Primary 2 x 2...

Страница 66: ...0467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 2 Shelf Management Commands abortrev Example Abort the graceful upgrade to firmware file pxm45_002 000 000 000_mgx fw so 2 0 0 is the version The system prompts you to confirm that you want the command to execute pinnacle 8 PXM a abortrev 8 2 0 0 ...

Страница 67: ...not age and are not deleted To delete a trap manager use either the deltrapmgr command or an SNMP Set on the intended object Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax addtrapmgr ip_addr portnum Syntax Description Related Commands deltrapmgr dsptrapmgr Attributes Example Add a trap manager with IP address 161 10 144 56 to port 50 node501 7 PXM a addtrapmgr 161 10 144 56 50 ip_addr IP address in...

Страница 68: ...cription In descending order of access privilege Service for potentially dangerous configuration commands or complex troubleshooting commands Superuser Group 1 Any user Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax adduser user ID accessLevel Syntax Description After you enter a user ID and access level the system prompts for a password as the example shows user ID String that you enter to log int...

Страница 69: ...ers If the privilege level of the current user in this example is GROUP1 or lower the command fails after you enter the password for the second time and the system returns a message stating that you entered an incoherent value for l the level pinnacle 7 PXM a adduser fin GROUP1 Enter password Re enter password Add the user leroy but without establishing a password for leroy The system displays the...

Страница 70: ... are inet on ethernet e and gateway inet g The bootChange command presents one parameter at a time Therefore press the Return or Enter key at each prompt except for these two The example in this description shows the two fields where you need to enter an IP address and the fields you skip Note The boot IP address does not get saved with saveallcnf Note Use the ipifconfig command to assign IP addre...

Страница 71: ...l the fields that the node presents For all fields except the ethernet and gateway prompts press Return or Enter pinnacle 7 PXM a bootChange clear field go to previous field D quit boot device lnPci processor number 0 host name winter file name users joloughl pxm45_002 000 014 A1 fw inet on ethernet e 170 11 52 61 inet on backplane b host inet h 170 11 25 42 gateway inet g 170 11 52 2 user u rli f...

Страница 72: ...slot number of the card and the revision number of boot software to burn Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspcd slot revision Syntax Description Related Commands None Attributes Example This example burns boot software version 2 0 1 166 D on slot 1 MGX8850 7 PXM a burnboot 1 2 0 1 166 D slot The slot number of the standby AXSM card on which to burn the software revision The revision n...

Страница 73: ...the CLI in slot 8 and make the appropriate change The attributes consist of The required card state for execution The minimum user privilege for the command Whether an incident of command execution appears in a log file Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clidbxlevel level Syntax Description Related Commands None Attributes Example Specify level 1 for the CLI Obtain attributes for all us...

Страница 74: ...P address see bootchange and the time of day Caution Be absolutely sure you need to execute clrallcnf because it clears all configuration files on the PXM45 After you enter clrallcnf the system prompts you to confirm the action Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clrallcnf Related Commands None Attributes Example Clear all the configuration elements for all the cards in the node The syst...

Страница 75: ...Other physical and logical provisioning The following information is automatically saved then restored after reboot IP address information for LAN ATM and SLIP SVC address information for ATM port for IP connectivity PVC address information for ATM port for IP connectivity Up to 51 records for user ID login passwords and access levels CLI special configuration options cntpAuthParams One record for...

Страница 76: ...yntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands None Attributes Example Clear all the configuration elements for all the cards in the node The system prompts for confirmation node1 7 PXM a clrcnf All SM s disk config will be deleted and the shelf will be reset Do you want to proceed Yes No Log no log State active Privilege SERVICE_GP ...

Страница 77: ...n applies to both upper and lower sources Note In the current release you can specify only the cable type Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfclkparms signal type cable type Syntax Description Related Commands None Attributes signal type Specifies whether the signal type for the clock is data or a synchronization signal Enter a 1 for data or a 2 for synchronization cable type Specifie...

Страница 78: ...des Currently automatic propagation of a master clock through the network is not available To propagate the BITS sourced clock to the other nodes you execute cnfclksrc on the PXM45 at each node to specify primary and secondary clocks derived from the AXSMs For a description of line level looped timing refer to the cnfln description the chapter Equipment and Resource Provisioning With looped timing...

Страница 79: ...is the logical slot number 7 for a BITS circuit on the PXM45 UI S3 regardless of where the active PXM45 resides port is a logical number that indicates the upper or lower external clock connector on the PXM45 UI S3 The logical port number for the upper connector is 35 The lower connector is 36 bits a required keyword once you specify slot number 7 and a port number of 35 or 36 because you have ide...

Страница 80: ...stem automatically deconfigures the existing primary source Configuring a BITS Clock You can configure a node to obtain its primary and secondary clocks through the BITS circuitry on the PXM UI S3 The PXM UI S3 has two connectors to receive highly stable clocks from an external device The PXM UI S3 can support stratum levels 1 3 If the primary and secondary clocks are externally sourced they must ...

Страница 81: ... the periods and colons Upon successful execution the system displays a confirmation message pinnacle 7 PXM a cnfclksrc primary 7 35 bits e1 Clock Manager has been successfully executed pinnacle 7 PXM a cnfclksrc secondary 3 1 1 10 Clock Manager has been successfully executed Configure a primary network clock to revert to the highest priority E1 clock source after recuperation from a failure Upon ...

Страница 82: ...t return a message unless an error occurred To see the date execute dspdate Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfdate mm dd yyyy Syntax Description Related Commands dspdate Attributes Example Set date to June 26 2000 excel 1 3 PXM a cnfdate 06 26 2000 mm dd yyyy mm is the month in the range 01 12 dd is the day in the range 01 31 yyyy is the year in the range 0000 9999 Log log State act...

Страница 83: ...the node name is the first item in the display Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfname node name Syntax Description Related Commands None Attributes Example Configure the node name to be MGX8850 The system requests you to confirm the name The CLI prompt returns with the new name In this example however the name as it appears in the prompt is truncated to eight characters because of s...

Страница 84: ... an infinite time period is that only a specified count of resets can stop the resets The default is 3600 seconds 1 hour Option 2 lets you select the maximum number of resets of the shelf management card group per time period Its characteristics are The number is an eight bit decimal number and therefore has the range 0 255 The meaning of a 0 for this parameter is an infinite number of resets the ...

Страница 85: ...purposes with cnfndparms 0x0 means no fan try requirement The enclosure still must have at least one fan tray for cooling 0x01 refers to the bottom fan tray 0x02 refers to the top fan tray To require top and bottom fan trays for example enter a hexadecimal 3 for the option value 0x01 0x02 0x03 Option Values This scheme allows substantial flexibility for the numeric value of current and future opti...

Страница 86: ... core card The default is enable which means an alarm appears in the absence of a redundant core card Option 4 lets you enable or disable expanded memory on the PXM45 B Enter yes to enable or no to disable The default is disable Option 5 you specify the locations of required power supplies in an AC powered system The number is 8 bit hexadecimal 0x0 the default means no specified power supply requi...

Страница 87: ... Window 0 infinite 3 Yes Boolean Core Redundancy Enabled 4 No Boolean Expanded Memory on PXM45B Enabled 5 0x0 8bit Hex Required Power Supply Module Bitmap 6 0x0 8bit Hex Required Fan Tray Unit Bitmap Enter option number 1 5 1 NODE CONFIGURATION OPTIONS Opt Value Type Description 1 3600 16bit Decimal SHM Card Reset Sliding Window secs Interval used to measure maximum number of card resets allowed V...

Страница 88: ... the new password then prompts you to re enter it Note The default password is for a user account is newuser Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfpasswd password Syntax Description Related Commands adduser dspusers cnfuser Attributes Change your password After you enter the command it prompts you once to enter a new password then prompts you to re enter it pinnacle 8 PXM a cnfpasswd En...

Страница 89: ...d terminals are frequently available Each port connects to a different type of terminal implementation Refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Software Configuration Guide for a description of how to use these physical ports for switch control Cards on Which This Command Executes PXM45 Syntax cnfserialif port speed Syntax Description Related Commands delserialif dspserialif Attributes Example C...

Страница 90: ... permits access to the SNMP Protocol Further the access of either read only or read write allows operations on MIB Objects according to the setting The setting can be either ro for read only or rw for read write The default is read only With read only authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects With read write access authorized management stations are able to retrieve and ...

Страница 91: ...ode19 8 PXM a community string comaccess read only access node19 8 PXM a cnfsnmp community comaccess ro node19 8 PXM a community string comaccess read only access node19 8 PXM a cnfsnmp community superaccess rw node19 8 PXM a community string superaccess read write access Give an E mail address for t he system contact node19 8 PXM a cnfsnmp contact Dial System Email Specify the location of the sys...

Страница 92: ...ime zone through cnftmzn and optional GMT offset through cnftmzngmt before you configure the time through cnftime Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnftime hh mm ss Syntax Description Related Commands cnfdate cnftmzn dspdate Attributes Example Set time for 2 PM plus 11 minutes and 22 seconds excel 1 3 PXM a cnftime 14 11 22 hh mm ss The format for time specification is hh is the hour i...

Страница 93: ...no messages unless an error occurs To see the time zone execute dspdate Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnftmzn timezone Syntax Description Related Commands cnftime cnfdate cnftmzngmt dspdate Attributes Example Configure the time zone in the node to U S Pacific Standard Time excel 1 3 PXM a cnftmzn PST timezone The possible time zones requires all uppercase characters GMT Greenwich M...

Страница 94: ...following sequence First use cnftmzn to specify the time zone as GMT Then specify an offset in hours relative to Greenwich Mean Time by executing cnftmzngmt The values are GMT plus or minus an integer in the range 1 12 Use dspdate to see the time Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnftmzngmt timeoffsetGMT Syntax Description Related Commands cnftmzn cnftime cnfdate dspdate Attributes Exa...

Страница 95: ... dsppswdexpire Attributes u Keyword that specifies a string of 1 12 characters that identifies a user The maximum number of users a system can accept is 50 p Optional Keyword that specifies a new password with 5 15 characters for userId l Optional Keyword that specifies a new access level for the user The accessLevel can be SERVICE_GP SUPER_GP GROUP1 or ANYUSER The new level you type must be lower...

Страница 96: ... privilege of the current user raviraj 7 PXM a cnfuser u rocky p nevermind l GROUP1 i 20 Example screens of a user changing the password when password expiration check is On MGX8850 8 PXM a Login superuser password Password has expired New password Re enter new password ERR Password too short minimum 5 characters New password Re enter new password ERR Twice entered passwords mis match New password...

Страница 97: ...e 2 7 for a single card and Table 2 8 for a redundant card pair 1 loadrev loads a firmware version from the hard disk to a card s memory In a non redundant card setup loadrev does not cause the system to reset the card 2 runrev causes the primary card to start running the new version For a redundant pair of cards the standby becomes the active card then starts running the new version 3 If an unacc...

Страница 98: ...m45_002 000 000 000_mgx fw so 2 0 0 is the version The system prompts you to confirm that you want the command to execute pinnacle 8 PXM a commitrev 8 2 0 0 Table 2 8 Redundant Pair Upgrade From 2 x to 2 y Firmware status Before upgrade After loadrev After runrev After commitrev Active Standby Active Standby Standby Active Standby Active Primary 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 y 2 y 2 y 2 y Secondary 2 x 2 x 2 ...

Страница 99: ...lclksrc Note If the node has a redundant PXM45 it automatically receives changes you make to the clock configuration as well as automated changes to clock status that occur under node management For example executing delclksrc is a configuration change that the standby card automatically implements Also a switch from primary to secondary clock source is also recorded by the standby PXM45 Cards on ...

Страница 100: ...rapmgr For more information about trap managers see the Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Software Configuration Guide or the addtrapmgr description in this book Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax deltrapmgr ip_addr Syntax Description Related Commands addtrapmgr dsptrapmgr Attributes Example Delete trap manager with IP address 161 10 144 56 node501 7 PXM a deltrapmgr 161 10 144 56 ip_addr I...

Страница 101: ...vilege level higher than the level at which you execute the command For example if the current user privilege is 2 GROUP2 you cannot delete a user at level 1 GROUP1 See the adduser description for the user privilege hierarchy No screen output appears unless an error occurs Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax deluser user ID Syntax Description Related Commands dspusers adduser Attributes ...

Страница 102: ...way to download the boot code to the standby PXM45 Note Make sure only one version of backup boot code resides in the firmware directory either delete or rename old versions to ensure that downloadflash uses the correct version Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax downloadflash Related Commands None Attributes Example Do a PXM45 boot code load Start with a tftp to the boot code source Con...

Страница 103: ...d revision number PCB 73 level part number Chassis serial number CLEI code PCB 28 level part number Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspbkpl Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands None Attributes Example Display details about the backplane Unknown 8 PXM a dspbkpl BackPlane Information Card Type 0x12b Chassis 800 level P N 800 03145 07 Chassis 800 level re...

Страница 104: ...group and the maximum number of connections in that port group A port group consists of one to many physical lines This maximum connection count is a function of the hardware interface type OC 3 OC 12 and so on The port group information also shows the number of existing SVCs SPVCs and SPVPs Use the maximum number of supported connections to help you configure resource partitions If a particular r...

Страница 105: ...um3 PXM HardDiskDrive State Active Active Active Serial Number SAK033600AN SBK044200J8 SAK0403005Q Prim SW Rev 2 0 14 8 P1 Sec SW Rev 2 0 14 8 P1 Cur SW Rev 2 0 14 8 P1 Boot FW Rev 2 0 14 8 P1 800 level Rev 12 A0 06 800 level Part 800 05983 01 800 05787 02 800 05052 03 CLEI Code 0000000000 BA7IBCLAAA 0000000000 Reset Reason On Reset From Shell Card Alarm NONE Failed Reason None Miscellaneous Infor...

Страница 106: ...6 3 800 4819 1 PCA Part 73 4504 2 73 3845 1 Reset Reason On Power up Card SCT Id 2 Type CR to continue Q CR to stop Lines Ports Partitions SPVC SPVP SVC 2 2 2 10 0 10 Port Group 1 Chans supported 32512 Lines 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Port Group 2 Chans supported 32512 Lines 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 Port Group 3 Chans supported 32512 Lines 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 Port Group 4 Chans supported 32512 Lines 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 ...

Страница 107: ...the Revision level of the boot firmware Revision level of the system software Date and time of command execution including GMT offset Backplane serial number and its hardware revision level The IP address of the statistics master a workstation Type of card in the front and back slots and the active standby state of each Alarm status for each card and the shelf itself Redundancy configuration for e...

Страница 108: ...ancy Slot Card State Type Status Slot Type 01 Active Active AXSM_1OC48 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 02 Active Active AXSM_1OC48 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 03 Active Active AXSM_16OC3 NONE 04 PRIMARY SLOT 04 Standby Active AXSM_16OC3 NONE 03 SECONDARY SLOT 05 Active Active AXSM_4OC12 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 06 Active Active AXSM_4OC12 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 07 Active Active PXM45 NONE 08 PRIMARY SLOT 08 Standby A...

Страница 109: ...ull source is presumed to be the internal oscillator Possible Sources The source of the clock has the format shelf slot subslot port subport More typically the source has the two part short hand form slot line or slot port If the source is an AXSM the format is slot line For a BITS clock the format is slot port The slot for a BITS clock is 7 The logical port is always 35 or 36 Port 35 refers to th...

Страница 110: ...le 2 9 Reasons for Change of Clock State Reason Meaning okay The clock source is okay unknown reason The clock manager has no information for Reason no clock signal Loss of signal LOS on the clock source frequency too high The frequency has drifted too high frequency too low The frequency has drifted too low excessive jitter Jitter has exceeded tolerance for this stratum missing card or component ...

Страница 111: ...information on revertive behavior see the cnfclksrc description Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspclksrcs Related Commands cnfclksrc delclksrc dspclkalms Attributes Example Display the current clock sources The display shows that both the primary and secondary clocks are good They are sourced at lines 2 and 3 of the AXSM in slot 6 Also the active clock is provided by the the primary...

Страница 112: ...clock status not configured Primary clock reason okay Secondary clock type null Secondary clock source 0 0 Secondary clock status not configured Secondary clock reason okay Active clock internal clock source switchover mode non revertive Display information about the clock sources This example shows a BITS clock for the primary source with revertive mode enabled pop20one 7 PXM a dspclksrcs Primary...

Страница 113: ...arge relative to typical usage and therefore does not present potential restrictions The output shows the allocated space rather than the physical capacity of the drive Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspdisk Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands cd Attributes Example Display the utilization for the default partition C orpswp3 2 PXM a dspdisk Partition ...

Страница 114: ...ifconfig dspipif dspipifcache setipconndebug Attributes Example Display the task information IP connection on the PXM45 Note that the Task Debug Level can be modified through the setipconndebug command MGX8850 7 PXM a dspipconntask IP CONNECTIVITY TASK INFORMATION Task State ACTIVE Card State READY Task Id 0x10010 Subtask Id 0x1005c Disk API State OK SyncRam API State OK Task SyncRam State UPDATE ...

Страница 115: ... Example Display information for all IP interfaces The output shows that no configuration exists for the ATM interface but do for Ethernet and SLIP Note that for each interface in the current release the unit number has no meaning The Flags field for Ethernet shows that the interface is UP a broadcast address has been configured ARP is enabled and that the interface is running See the ipifconfig d...

Страница 116: ...adcast address 172 29 255 255 Netmask 0xffff0000 Subnetmask 0xffff0000 Ethernet address is 00 00 1a 53 c8 2c Metric is 0 Maximum Transfer Unit size is 1500 265475 packets received 18864 packets sent 0 input errors 0 output errors 0 collisions Disk IP address Not Configured Additional Flags 0x0 sl unit number 0 Flags 0x71 UP POINT TO POINT ARP RUNNING Internet address 0 0 0 0 Destination Internet a...

Страница 117: ...config Attributes Example Display the contents of the IP interface cache The display shows that the cache currently is empty node19 8 PXM a dspipifcache node19 System Rev 02 00 Apr 07 2000 16 22 18 PST MGX8850 Shelf Alarm NONE IP CONNECTIVITY INTERFACE CACHE Interface IpAddress VcId Age Flush 120000 Flags No Entries interface Optional The interface type If you do not specify an interface type the ...

Страница 118: ...x dspndparms Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands cnfndparms Attributes Example Display the current node parameters MGX8850 7 PXM a dspndparms MGX8850 System Rev 02 01 Sep 04 2001 12 08 16 PST MGX8850 Node Alarm CRITICAL NODE CONFIGURATION OPTIONS Opt Value Type Description 1 3600 16bit Decimal SHM Card Reset Sliding Window secs 2 3 8bit Decimal SHM Max Card Resets ...

Страница 119: ...tm0 in the output Ethernet lnPcio0 in the output SLIP interface sl0 in the output Alarms if any The operational state Flags specified for the PVC support through the pvcifconfig command The number of logical connection numbers LCNs in the receive and transmit direction Numbers in input and output frames Cards on Which This Command Executes PXM45 Syntax dsppvcif Syntax Description This command take...

Страница 120: ...Display the current ATM interface state orioses5 1 PXM a dsppvcif orioses5 System Rev 01 00 Aug 10 2000 18 36 01 GMT SES CNTL Node Alarm NONE IP CONNECTIVITY PVC CACHE atm unit number 0 Feeder VPI VCI 3 8 Flags 0x38 VCMUX PVC FEEDER State 0x1 UP RxLCN 722 TxLCN 32776 LCNindex 0 Feeder Name svcbpx16 Input Frames 10 Output Frames 10 Input Errors 0 Output Errors 0 ...

Страница 121: ...s and the status of the revision change Usually a revision change is an upgrade rather than a downgrade For information on graceful firmware upgrades see loadrev runrev and so on Note that the dspversion command shows the current and boot firmware versions for only the current slot Note The portion of the display that shows slots 17 32 is reserved for future use Cards on Which This Command Runs PX...

Страница 122: ...4 39 05 PST MGX8850 Node Alarm CRITICAL Phy Log Cur Sw Prim Sw Sec Sw Rev Chg Slot Slot Revision Revision Revision Status 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 2 0 123 A1 2 0 123 A1 2 0 123 A1 05 05 06 06 07 07 2 0 123 1 2 0 123 1 2 0 123 1 08 07 2 0 123 1 2 0 123 1 09 09 10 10 11 11 2 0 123 A1 2 0 123 A1 2 0 123 A1 12 12 2 0 116 1 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 Display revisions SanJose 7 PXM a dsprevs SanJose System...

Страница 123: ...65 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 2 Shelf Management Commands dsprevs 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 ...

Страница 124: ...anation See the Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Software Configuration Guide for an explanation of the application of these physical ports Cards on Which This Command Executes PXM45 Syntax dspserialif port Syntax Description Related Commands addserialif delserialif cnfserialif Attributes Example Display the console port speed Jupiter_Lower 7 PXM a dspserialif 2 SerialPortNum 2 SerialPortType console...

Страница 125: ... strings Cards on Which This Card Executes PXM45 Syntax dspsnmp Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Attributes Example Display the current SNMP strings This example shows that the only specified string is the community ro node19 8 PXM a dspsnmp node19 System Rev 02 00 Apr 11 2000 15 04 00 PST MGX8850 Shelf Alarm NONE Community ro System Location System Contact Log no log State acti...

Страница 126: ... work station Row status Read trap flag stats Next trap sequence number Of these elements the IP address and port number result from addtrapmgr Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsptrapmgr Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands addtrapmgr deltrapmgr Attributes Example Display trap managers node19 8 PXM a dsptrapmgr ipAddress PortNum RowStatus ReadTrapFlag ...

Страница 127: ...ess level of that user only Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspusers u userID Syntax Description Related Commands adduser deluser cnfuser Attributes Example Show all configured users raviraj 7 PXM a dspusers UserId AccessLevel cisco CISCO_GP service SERVICE_GP superuser SUPER_GP Show access level for a specified user The user ID is raoul raviraj 7 PXM a dspusers u raoul UserId Access...

Страница 128: ...tform is an optional field because it applies to only the PXM45 For example a firmware file may have the name axsm_002 000 000 001 fw Within this filename the version portion is 002 000 000 001 Note the absence of mgx This version portion has the following format major release minor release maintenance patch Using the example of axsm_002 000 000 001 fw the version is 2 0 1 1 Similarly if no patch ...

Страница 129: ...2 0 0 1 A1 Note the phase number is A1 2 0 0 10 D2 Note the phase number is D2 2 0 0 248 P1 2 0 0 1 P2 2 0 0 113 P3 2 0 0 10 P4 Cards on Which This Command Executes PXM45 AXSM Syntax dspversion Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands abortrev commitrev loadrev runrev setrev dspcd Attributes Example Display the firmware version for the current PXM45 pop20two 7 PXM a dsp...

Страница 130: ...nal state of the interface up or down Usage Guidelines Except for the first time mandatory configuration of an IP address for the interface the ipifconfig parameters are optional details that you can use to modify the interface The design of the parameters includes default states that apply to a broad range of network designs The purpose of this default design is to minimize the need to change the...

Страница 131: ...tted decimal format Ideally the PXM45 and any routers associated with connected workstations exist in the same subnet Specifically having the same subnet mask simplifies router configuration broadcast Optional Broadcast address applies to only Ethernet up down Optional Set the interface to be either up or down Default is up Setting it to down turns off all IP packet communication You should have a...

Страница 132: ...t support SVCs With PVC support enabled you subsequently set up a PVC to that device by executing pvcifconfig If PVC support is not enabled pvcifconfig fails If you change this value type the word pvc or nopvc in its entirety default nodefault Optional Specifies whether to use this interface as the default interface As stated in the description of the interface parameter the default interface is E...

Страница 133: ...rsion For a redundant pair of cards the standby becomes the active card then starts running the new version 3 If an unacceptable problem occurs the optional abortrev command restores the previous version of firmware as well as the previous database contents 4 commitrev declares the new primary version to be acceptable and removes the old primary from main memory but not the hard disk A graceful up...

Страница 134: ...45 For example a firmware file may have the name axsm_002 000 000 001 fw Within this filename the version portion is 002 000 000 001 Note the absence of mgx This version portion has the following format major release minor release maintenance patch The range for each release maintenance and patch is 0 255 Note that as you read left to right each element is a superset of the element on the right an...

Страница 135: ...ommand Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 2 Shelf Management Commands loadrev For example the significance of 2 0 14 8 P1 is shown below major release minor release maintenance patch phase 2 1 6 0 P1 ...

Страница 136: ...imal maintenance number of 1 The last three bullets show developmental revision numbers 2 0 1 Note the absence of a patch number 2 0 1 248 Note the patch number is 248 2 0 0 1 A1 Note the phase number is A1 2 0 0 10 D2 Note the phase number is D2 2 0 0 248 P1 2 0 0 1 P2 2 0 0 113 P3 2 0 0 10 P4 Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax loadrev slot revision Syntax Description Related Commands ...

Страница 137: ...pend on the type of interface router local Specifies whether the AESA corresponds to a router or the local PXM45 Both router and local ends should be configured Configure the local end first then execute pvcifconfig to specify the router end You must enter the entirety of one of these keywords The AESA is an NSAP address used by the router or the local PXM45 pvc_address The VPI and VCI of the PVC ...

Страница 138: ...tional Resets the PVC delete Optional Delete the specified AESA configuration clrstats Optional Clear all SVC statistics on this interface up Optional Put the PVC in the UP state and try to bind the associated lcns default nodefault Optional Specifies whether this PVC is the default route on the interface clrstats Optional Clear any statistics for this PVC dropped packets for example Log no log St...

Страница 139: ...yntax resetsys Syntax Description This command takes no parameters but displays a warning and prompts you to continue the execution Related Commands resetcd Attributes Example Reset the system When prompted to confirm this action say no pinnacle 7 PXM a resetsys This command resets the entire shelf a destructive command Please confirm now Do you want to proceed Yes No no command not executed Log n...

Страница 140: ...ilename v Syntax Description Related Commands saveallcnf Attributes Example Restore the system configuration created on February 5 2001 The system responds with a statement of what the command would do and prompts you to accept the action before it proceeds with command execution pinnacle 7 PXM a restoreallcnf f pop20two_01_200102051156 zip The current configuration will be replaced with the conte...

Страница 141: ... 2 10 and Table 2 11 for a clarification of the various states within this sequence 1 loadrev loads a firmware version from the hard disk to a card s memory In a non redundant card setup loadrev does not cause the system to reset the card 2 runrev causes the primary card to start running the new version For a redundant pair of cards the standby becomes the active card then starts running the new v...

Страница 142: ...change Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax runrev slot revision Syntax Description Related Commands abortrev commitrev loadrev setrev dspcd dspversion Attributes Table 2 13 Redundant Pair Upgrade From 2 x to 2 y Firmware status Before upgrade After loadrev After runrev After commitrev Active Standby Active Standby Standby Active Standby Active Primary 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 x 2 y 2 y 2 y 2 y Seco...

Страница 143: ... Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 2 Shelf Management Commands runrev Example Run version 2 0 0 4 in logical slot 7 A previous check of the cards by using dspcds and firmware images by using dspcd would show whether a redundant card and version 2 0 0 4 are present excel 8 PXM a runrev 7 2 0 0 4 ...

Страница 144: ... 0 0 172 29 23 1 3 0 2755 lnPci0 172 1 1 0 172 1 1 149 1 0 0 atm0 172 29 23 0 172 29 23 149 1 2 5275 lnPci0 ROUTE HOST TABLE destination gateway flags Refcnt Use Interface 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 sl0 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 5 1 0 lo0 172 29 23 3 172 1 1 149 5 0 3555 atm0 172 29 23 5 172 1 1 149 5 0 3304 atm0 172 29 23 7 172 1 1 149 5 0 3335 atm0 171 71 29 18 172 1 1 149 5 0 3304 atm0 172 29 23 18 172 1 ...

Страница 145: ...ork layer of the operating system Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax routestatShow Related Commands routeShow Attributes Example Display the current IP routing statistics for the network layer of the operating system pinnacle 8 PXM a routestatShow routing 0 bad routing redirect 0 dynamically created route 0 new gateway due to redirects 0 destination found unreachable 11095 uses of a wil...

Страница 146: ...ing message prompts you for confirmation before the system performs the task Upon completion the system displays the name of the saved configuration file The system stores up to two zipped configuration files If you want to save more than two configurations use FTP to transfer the files to another device To restore the system configuration use restoreallcnf Note You should execute saveallcnf only ...

Страница 147: ...Note that the system displays the name of the saved configuration file MGX8850 7 PXM a saveallcnf The saveallcnf command can be time consuming The shelf must not provision new circuits while this command is running Do not run this command unless the shelf configuration is stable or you risk corrupting the saved configuration file saveallcnf Do you want to proceed Yes No n command not executed ...

Страница 148: ... debug to console and specify a debug level of 20 for SVC call events node19 8 PXM a setipconndebug console 20 console no console Configure where to run setipconndebig console ASCII terminal or elsewhere debuglevel Specifies a debug level To select one or all of the following levels enter the associated hexadecimal number and include the leading 0x see example No Logging 0x0 Task Errors 0x1 Task D...

Страница 149: ...version number of a firmware image Commands such as loadrev and setrev require a version number rather than a filename Similarly dspversion shows the firmware version number rather than the firmware filename Although the version number derives from the firmware filename they are distinctly different Firmware Filenames The FW directory on the hard drive contains firmware files of possibly many revi...

Страница 150: ...nce of a patch number 2 0 1 248 Note the patch number is 248 2 0 0 1 A1 Note the phase number is A1 2 0 0 10 D2 Note the phase number is D2 2 0 0 248 P1 2 0 0 1 P2 2 0 0 113 P3 2 0 0 10 P4 Note The setrev command resets the active PXM45 only if the revision changes on the active card are a result of the setrev command Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax setrev slot version Note With the ...

Страница 151: ...m45tl System Rev 00 00 Jan 05 2000 15 18 40 GMT Boot F W Rev 0 0 0 H W Rev 00 00 GMT Offset 0 Backplane Serial No _UNKNOWN___ Backplane HW Rev 00 00 Statistics Master IP Address 0 0 0 0 Shelf Alarm NONE Card Front Back Card Alarm Redundant Redundancy Slot Card State Type Status Slot Type 01 Empty 02 Empty 03 Empty 04 Empty 05 Empty 06 Empty 07 Active Empty UNKNOWN_FC NONE 08 PRIMARY SLOT 08 Empty ...

Страница 152: ...AJOR 07 SECONDARY SLOT 09 Init Empty AXSM_16OC3 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 10 Empty 11 Empty 12 Empty 13 Empty 14 Empty Step 6 The next execution of dspcds indicates the card is active Therefore the firmware is running pxm45tl System Rev 00 00 Jan 05 2000 15 21 11 GMT Boot F W Rev 0 0 0 H W Rev 00 00 GMT Offset 0 Backplane Serial No _UNKNOWN___ Backplane HW Rev 00 00 Statistics Master IP Address 0 0 0 ...

Страница 153: ...tax Description Enter all keywords in their entirety interface Alphanumeric string identify the interface type for the current SVC configuration The choices are lnPci0 for Ethernet the default on power up atm0 for the ATM sl0 for SLIP Enter the entire keyword Where appropriate each subsequent parameter description identifies characteristics that depend on the type of interface router local Specifi...

Страница 154: ...0 0000 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 0101 01 llcencap vcmux Applies to the router link only This parameter specifies encapsulation The choice primarily depends on whether the router supports LLC Snap encapsulation llcsnap The alternative is VC based multiplexing vcmux default nodefault Optional Specifies whether this SVC is the default route on the interface reset Optional Reset of the SVC The SVC is f...

Страница 155: ... is not available the node blocks the switchcc command You cannot execute switchcc during a configuration copy If you attempt it the system displays the message Core card redundancy unavailable Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax switchcc Related Commands None Attributes Example Attempt a switchcc without a standby PXM45 raviraj 7 PXM a switchcc Do you want to proceed Yes No y Core card ...

Страница 156: ...sion in the chain The purpose of the escape sequence Esc key then escape character is to terminate the telnet attempt if the destination node is unable to accept the telnet session for reasons such as the destination switch is down or unreachable its in backup boot mode or it detects that TCP communication is down If you use the escape sequence the session falls back to the first switch in the tel...

Страница 157: ...e whether it can let you telnet to another node Eventually return to the source node by exiting the destination node pop20two 8 PXM a telnet 172 39 52 76 Trying 172 39 52 76 Connected to 172 39 52 76 Login superuser password 8850NY 7 PXM a telnet nothing appropriate 8850NY 7 PXM a dspversion Image Type Shelf Type Card Type Version Built On Runtime MGX PXM45 2 0 10 2 Sep 20 2000 08 40 25 Boot MGX P...

Страница 158: ...ut To disable the session timeout function specify 0 seconds Note The timeout command is the same as the sesntimeout command Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax timeout time_out Syntax Description Related Commands sesntimeout Attributes Examples Display the current timeout pinnacle 7 PXM a timeout The timeout period for this session is currently 600 second s pinnacle 7 PXM a Set the...

Страница 159: ...the login name Point from which the user gained access for example an IP address in the case of a telnet session or the word console if the user logged in through a local terminal at the console port Note that users shows the current user sessions whereas the dspusers command shows the names of all the user accounts on the switch whether or not a corresponding user has logged in Cards on Which Thi...

Страница 160: ...rom IP address 10 18 247 21 The idle time is 0 because the current user has just executed the users command If other user sessions were running and one or more were idle the idle time for each user would be a non zero number Change to the AXSM CLI and execute users pop20one 7 PXM a users Port Slot Idle UserId From telnet 01 7 0 00 00 davids4 10 18 247 21 pop20one 10 AXSM a users Port Slot Idle Use...

Страница 161: ... position dependent parameters you must type parameters in the order they appear in the syntax description or on line help To create a logical port for example the position dependent syntax is addport ifNum bay line guaranteedRate maxrate sctID ifType vpi For a keyword driven parameter a keyword must precede the value The keyword is preceded by a dash and followed by the parameter timeout secs for...

Страница 162: ...n the AXSM 16 155 and AXSM 16 T3E3 16 as the name indicates The MGX 8850 switch features the concept of a bay The bay refers to the upper or lower location of a single height card The switch has a double height card cage so a single height back card necessarily occupies either an upper or lower position The T3 E3 OC 3 and OC 12 versions of the AXSM can have two back cards one in bay 1 upper locati...

Страница 163: ...m the way PNNI and the lower levels of logic identify the same element the sequence of commands also needs explanation When you configure logical ports for just one example you must complete certain tasks on the AXSM CLI before or after related PNNI tasks For certain commands this manual lists prerequisite commands or tasks For more details on the sequence of tasks refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Rout...

Страница 164: ...duct and so is usually omitted The slot number of the front card Subslot is the number of the bay where the back card resides This number is 1 or 2 Port is the physical line Subport corresponds to the resource partition on the AXSM For a UNI or NNI this resource partition is the same number as the logical port number ifNum on the AXSM For a virtual network to network interface VNNI the number does...

Страница 165: ...ting Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 3 Equipment and Resource Provisioning Identifying Physical and Logical Elements Bay 2 Line 1 Logical interface 1 or logical port 1 ...

Страница 166: ...t switch the user traffic to the standby line within 50 milliseconds When the revertive option is enabled see cnfapsln the in band signaling protocol will attempt to switch the user traffic back to the working line from the protection line after the working line becomes functional again However it must wait for the configured time period wait to restore to elapse Direction APS can be configured in...

Страница 167: ...witchapsln dspapsbkplane clrbecnt dspbecnt Attributes Example The following example assigns 1 1 APS redundancy to two lines on the same card MGX8850 9 AXSM a addapsln 9 2 1 9 2 2 1 workingIndex Slot number bay number and line number of the working line in the format slot bay line protectIndex Slot number bay number and line number of the protection line in the format slot bay line archmode The APS...

Страница 168: ...scprtn If you discover an error in your controller specification after you add it delete the controller by executing delcontroller then add it again Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax The syntax differs for internal and external controllers Internal controller addcontroller cntrlrId i cntrlrType lslot cntrlrName External controller addcontroller cntrlrId x cntrlrType lslot bay line vpi ...

Страница 169: ...onal A string to serve as a name for the controller cntrlrId A number in the range 4 20 that identifies a controller cntrlrId 1 3 is reserved for PAR PNNI and MPLS LSC respectively For external controllers cntrlrId can differ from cntrlrType x Keyword indicating that this controller is external cntrlrType A number in the range 1 3 that identifies the controller 1 PAR Portable AutoRoute currently n...

Страница 170: ...ternal PNNI controller Note that as stated in the Syntax Description for an Internal Controller the controller ID matches the controller type The optional controller name is pnni No system response appears unless an error occurs MGX8850 PXM45 a addcontroller 2 i 2 7 pnni vci Applies to only external controllers VCI in the range 1 65535 cntrlrName Optional A string to serve as a name for the contro...

Страница 171: ...a feeder node to a port that already has a connection established on it You cannot add a feeder node to a port with ILMI enabled You cannot enable ILMI on a port that has a feeder node connection on it For more detailed information on configuring a feeder see the Cisco MGX 8850 Switch Software Configuration Guide Release 2 Syntax addfdr ifNum Syntax Description Card s on Which This Command Execute...

Страница 172: ...age of bandwidth VPI and VCI ranges Guaranteed minimum and maximum number of connections Note The maximum number of connections must be greater than 10 Before adding a resource partition you must Activate physical lines on the card upln and optional cnfln Add logical ports to the physical lines addport or optional cnfport Run the addcontroller command on the PXM45 to identify the controller type t...

Страница 173: ...centage of the ingress bandwidth Each unit of ingminbw is 0 000001 of the total bandwidth available to the port For example an ingMinBw of 1000000 100 ingmaxbw A maximum percentage of the ingress bandwidth Each increment of ingmaxbw is 0 000001 of the total bandwidth on the port For example an ingMaxBw of 1000000 100 Note that the maximum ingress bandwidth must be at least 50 cps minvpi Minimum VP...

Страница 174: ... connections is 500 MGX8850 3 AXSM a addpart 4 4 2 100000 100000 100000 100000 10 110 100 2000 100 500 Check the configuration with dspparts and dsppart MGX8850 3 AXSM a dspparts if part Ctlr egr egr ingr ingr min max min max min max Num ID ID GuarBw MaxBw GuarBw MaxBw vpi vpi vci vci conn conn 0001 0001 0001 0001 4 4 2 100000 100000 100000 100000 10 110 100 2000 100 500 MGX8850 3 AXSM a dsppart 4...

Страница 175: ...plate approach to specifying parameters for large numbers of connections You can modify an individual connection as needed using cnfcon The name of such a template is Service Class Template SCT The targets of template application are the logical ports on the one hand and the card itself on the other The addport command lets you specify an SCT for a port and cnfcdsct lets you specify an SCT for the...

Страница 176: ...ne The line number is from 1 to the highest numbered line on the back card For the range of line numbers on specific AXSM models see Table 3 1 guaranteedRate Guaranteed rate on a port in cells per second For all interface types UNI NNI or VNNI guaranteedRate must be the same as maxrate The total guaranteed rates cannot exceed the highest value in the following ranges OC48 50 5651320 cps OC12 50 14...

Страница 177: ...vice class template SCT for the port The range is 0 255 The SCT file must exist on the PXM45 disk See cnfcdsct Cisco Systems provides SCT numbers 2 and 3 You can create more SCTs by modifying an existing SCT through the Cisco WAN Manager application and saving it with another SCT number Subsequently you can assign the new SCT to the port by the sctID parameter in cnfport Note Currently the system ...

Страница 178: ...cy exists use dspcd or dspcds Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax addred redPrimarySlotNum redSecondarySlotNum RedType Syntax Description Related Commands dspred delred switchredcd Attributes Example This example adds 1 1 Y Cable redundancy in slots 7 and 8 MGX8850 7 PXM a addred 7 8 1 redPrimarySlotNum Slot number that contains the primary card of the pair The ranges are 1 6 and 9 14 on...

Страница 179: ...anteed percentage of bandwidth VPI and VCI ranges Guaranteed minimum and maximum number of connections Note The maximum number of connections must be greater than 10 Before adding a resource partition you must Activate physical lines on the card upln and optional cnfln Add logical ports to the physical lines addport and optional cnfport Execute addcontroller on the PXM45 to identify a controller t...

Страница 180: ...e total bandwidth available on a port For example an ingMinBw of 1000000 100 ingmaxbw A maximum percentage of the ingress bandwidth Each increment of ingMaxBw is 0 00001 of the total bandwidth on the port For example an ingMaxBw of 1000000 100 Note that the maximum ingress bandwidth must be at least 50 cps minVpi Minimum VPI For NNI the range is 0 4095 For UNI the range is 0 255 For a virtual trun...

Страница 181: ... contents of the error counters use the dspbecnt command Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax clrbecnt working bay line Syntax Description Related Commands addapsln cnfapsln delapsln dspapsln dspapslns switchapsln dspbecnt Attributes working bay line Identifies the bay 1 or 2 and the number of the line The line number is from 1 to the highest numbered line on the back card For the range of...

Страница 182: ...m For more detailed information on configuring a feeder see the Cisco MGX 8850 Switch Software Configuration Guide Release 2 Syntax clrfdrstat ifNum Syntax Description Card s on Which This Command Executes AXSM Related Commands dspfdrstat Attributes Example clrfdrstat 1 ifNum The interface number of the port on which to clear the feeder statistics The interface numbers of active ports are displaye...

Страница 183: ...rotection Switching APS Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax cnfapsln w working line sf SignalFaultBER sd SignalDegradeBER wtr Wait To Restore dr direction rv revertive Syntax Description workingLine Slot number bay number and line number of the active line to configure in the format slot bay line Example w 1 1 1 SignalFaultBER A number between 3 and 5 indicating the Signal Fault Bit Error...

Страница 184: ...r 2 rv 1 Wait To Restore The number of minutes to wait after the working line has become functional again before switching back to the working line from the protection line The range is 5 12 Example wtr 5 direction 1 unidirectional 2 bidirectional Example dr 2 Bidirectional means that both the receiving and transmitting paths are switched Unidirectional means that only the affected path receiving ...

Страница 185: ...utes ln Specifies the bay and line number in the format bay line The bay is 1 or 2 The line can be from 1 to the highest numbered line on the back card For the line number ranges on an AXSM model see Table 3 1 sps Specifies the number that enables 1 or disables 2 payload scrambling The default value for PayloadScramble is enabled The setting must be the same at both ends of the line and throughout...

Страница 186: ...Equipment and Resource Provisioning cnfatmln Example For AXSM line 1 bay 1 disable payload scrambling and specify a null cell header MGX8850 7 AXSM a cnfatmln ln 1 1 sps 2 nch ab12abab For AXSM line 1 bay 1 enable payload scrambling and specify null cell headers MGX8850 1 AXSM a cnfatmln ln 1 1 sps 1 nch 1a1a1a1a ncp aa ...

Страница 187: ...dspcdsct Background The node supports a template approach to specifying parameters for large numbers of connections You can modify an individual connection as needed through cnfcon The name of such a template is service class template SCT The targets of template application are the logical ports on the one hand and the card itself on the other The addport command lets you specify an SCT for a port...

Страница 188: ...T number 3 for the current AXSM MGX8850 9 AXSM a cnfcdsct 3 The SCT file must reside on the PXM disk before you use this command or it fails and displays the error message in the following example MGX8850 1 6 AXSM a cnfcdsct sct 5 ERR SCT file not present Use tftp to load it on PXM disk Set failed due to illegal option value s Syntax cnfcdsct sctID sctID SCT file id between 0 and 255 SCT id Number...

Страница 189: ...eyword driven Therefore the order that you enter them does not matter sonet Identifies the bay 1 or 2 and the number of the line in the format bay line The range for line is from 1 to the highest numbered line on the back card For the range of line numbers on specific AXSM models see Table 3 1 slt A number that identifies the type of SONET line The range for LineType is 1 6 and have the following ...

Страница 190: ...ue for LineOOFCriteria is 1 or 2 and has the following significance 1 3 out of 8 An Out Of Frame condition is declared if at least 3 of 8 framing bits are in error 2 3 out of 16 An Out Of Frame condition is declared if at least 3 of 16 framing bits are in error cb A number that determines whether the node checks the C bit status in response to AIS status The value for LineAIScBitsCheck can be 1 or...

Страница 191: ...Provisioning cnfln Related Commands dsplns dspln dnln upln addlnloop Attributes Examples Configure T3 line 4 on the current card to have B8ZS coding and a length of 10 MGX8850 1 4 AXSM a cnfln ds3 4 2 10 Enable frame scrambling for SONET line 1 of the card in bay 1 MGX8850 1 4 AXSM a cnfln sonet 1 1 sfs 2 Log log State active Privilege GROUP1 ...

Страница 192: ...850 switch You can use either command Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax cnfpart if if id partionID ctlr controllerID emin egrMinBw emax egrMaxBw imin ingMinBw imax ingMaxBw vpmin minVpi vpmax maxVpi vcmin minVci vcmax maxVci mincon min connections maxcon max connections Note The maximum number of connections must be greater than 10 Syntax Description Note On a virtual trunk the min_vpi ...

Страница 193: ...f the total bandwidth available to the port For example an ingMinBw of 1000000 100 imax Specifies the maximum percentage of the ingress bandwidth Each increment of ingMaxBw is 0 00001 of the total bandwidth on the port For example an ingMaxBw of 1000000 100 Note that the maximum ingress bandwidth must be at least 50 cps vpmin Specifies the minimum VPI For NNI the range is 0 4095 For UNI the range ...

Страница 194: ... of dnport and upport appear in the chapter Troubleshooting Commands Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax cnfport if ifNum min guaranteedRate max maxrate sct sctID Syntax Description Note that this command uses the keyword or command delineator to identify the parameter that follows it After you identify the logical port with the ifNum parameter each remaining parameter is optional if A lo...

Страница 195: ...port in cells per second cps OC48 50 5651320 cps OC12 50 1412830 cps OC3 50 353207 cps T3 50 96000 PLCP or 104268 ADM cps E3 50 80000 cps sct Specifies the number of a service class template SCT for the egress direction The range is 0 255 Cisco provides a default of SCT 0 as well as SCT numbers 2 and 3 You can modify one of these SCTs through the Cisco WAN Manager application and assign another nu...

Страница 196: ...elease 1 of the MGX 8850 switch You can use either command Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax cnfrscprtn if if id partionID ctlr controllerID emin egrMinBw emax egrMaxBw imin ingMinBw imax ingMaxBw vpmin minVpi vpmax maxVpi vcmin minVci vcmax maxVci mincon min connections maxcon max connections Note The maximum number of connections must be greater than 10 Syntax Description Note On a vi...

Страница 197: ...s bandwidth Each unit of ingMinBw is 0 00001 of the total bandwidth available to the port For example an ingMinBw of 1000000 100 imax A maximum percentage of the ingress bandwidth Each increment of ingMaxBw is 0 00001 of the total bandwidth on the port For example an ingMaxBw of 1000000 100 Note that the maximum ingress bandwidth must be at least 50 cps vpmin Minimum VPI For NNI the range is 0 409...

Страница 198: ... for the addapsln command for a detailed explanation of Automatic Protection Switching APS Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax delapsln workingline Syntax Description Related Commands addapsln cnfapsln dspapsln switchapsln dspapsbkplane clrbecnt dspbecnt Attributes Example delapsln 1 1 1 workingline Slot number bay number and line number of the active line to delete in the format slot bay...

Страница 199: ...cts the switch not to use it Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax delcontroller cntrlrId Syntax Description Related Commands addcontroller dspcontrollers Attributes Example Delete controller 3 In this example the 3 is the reserved controller ID for LSC MGX8850 8 PXM a delcontroller 3 cntrlrId The controller ID cntrlrId has a range of 1 20 and is assigned by using the addcontroller command...

Страница 200: ...not delete a port that has feeder node connections on it For more detailed information on configuring a feeder see the Cisco MGX 8850 Switch Software Configuration Guide Release 2 Syntax delfdr ifNum Syntax Description Card s on Which This Command Executes AXSM Related Commands addfdr dspfdr dspfdrs Attributes Example delfdr 8 ifNum The interface number of the port from which the feeder node conne...

Страница 201: ...dpart Note The delpart and delrscprtn commands are identical The name delrscprtn is consistent with the corresponding command in Release 1 of the MGX 8850 switch You can use either command Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax delpart if_num part_id Syntax Description Related Commands addpart cnfpart dsppart Attributes Example MGX8850 1 9 AXSM a delpart 1 1 if_num Logical interface port num...

Страница 202: ...ns and resource partitions on the port before you can delete it Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax delport ifNum Syntax Description Related Commands addport cnfport dspport dspports Attributes ifNum A logical port interface number Only one logical port is allowed if the line operates as a UNI or NNI For the virtual network to network interface VNNI multiple ports can exist on a line For ...

Страница 203: ...ots Note 1 N redundancy requires a Service Resource Module SRM in the switch The current release does not support SRMs Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax delred redPrimarySlotNumber Syntax Description Related Commands addred dspred switchredcd Attributes redPrimarySlotNumber Slot number that contains the primary card of the pair The ranges are 1 6 and 9 14 on the MGX 8850 switch Log log...

Страница 204: ... addrscprtn Note The delpart and delrscprtn commands are identical The name cnfrscprtn is consistent with the corresponding command in Release 1 of the MGX 8850 switch You can use either command Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax delrscprtn if_num part_id Syntax Description Related Commands addrscprtn dsprscprtns Attributes Example MGX8850 1 9 AXSM a delrscprtn 1 1 if_num Logical interfa...

Страница 205: ...nlmi Down Local Management Interface De activates the Local Management Interface LMI on the specified logical port ifNum Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dnlmi ifNum Syntax Description Related Commands uplmi Attributes Example dnlmi 2 ifNum The interface number of the logical port on which to de activate the LMI Log log State active Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 206: ...see existing partitions and delrscprtn to remove partitions Step 3 Remove all logical ports Use dspports to see existing logical ports on the line and delport to remove logical ports Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dnln bay line Syntax Description Related Commands dspln dsplns cnfln upln Attributes Example De activate line 1 in bay 1 MGX8850 1 AXSM a dnln 1 1 bay line Identifies the b...

Страница 207: ...n NNI port through upport you cannot return the re routed connections to the upped port The PXM45 routes connections over the trunk as needed On a UNI the connections continue to exist but remain in the failed state until you enable the port by executing upport Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dnport ifNum Syntax Description Related Commands dspport dspports upport Attributes Example D...

Страница 208: ...isco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Hardware Installation Guide Release 2 for information on installing the APS assembly to the backplane Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspapsbkplane Syntax Description Related Commands addapsln cnfapsln delapsln dspapsln dspapslns switchapsln clrbecnt dspbecnt Attributes Example Example of executing dspapsbkplane when an APS assembly is successfully install...

Страница 209: ...for either a working line or a protection line See the addapsln command for an explanation of Automatic Protection Switching APS Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspapsln working slot bay line Syntax Description Related Commands addapsln cnfapsln delapsln dspapslns switchapsln dspapsbkplane clrbecnt dspbecnt Attributes working slot bay line Identity of the working line with the format ...

Страница 210: ...on bi Active Line working WTR min 5 SFBer 10 n 3 SDBer 10 n 5 Revertive No Last User Switch Req ForcedW P Bridge State WChan Bridged Selector State Selector Released Protection Line Pending Request None Working Line Pending Request ForcedSwitch APS Trouble Mask ChannelMismatch Bit Map Req Field Chan Field Transmit K1 0xe1 Forced Switch Working Channel 1 Receive K1 0x21 Reverse Request Working Chan...

Страница 211: ...lanation of Automatic Protection Switching APS Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspapslns Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands addapsln cnfapsln delapsln dspapsln switchapsln dspapsbkplane clrbecnt dspbecnt Attributes Example Display all lines with an APS configuration on the current AXSM MGX8850 3 AXSM a dspapslns Working Prot Conf Oper Active SFBer SDB...

Страница 212: ...d Runs AXSM Syntax dspatmln bay line Syntax Description Related Commands cnfatmln clratmlncnt Attributes Example Display the line configuration for line 1 of the AXSM 1 2448 MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspatmln 1 1 line HCScoset PayloadScramble NullCellHdr NullCellPayload 1 1 Enable Enable 1a1a1a1a aa bay line Identifies the bay 1 or 2 and the number of the line The line number is from 1 to the highest numbe...

Страница 213: ...r counters Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspbecnt working bay line Syntax Description Related Commands addapsln cnfapsln delapsln dspapsln dspapslns switchapsln dspapsbkplane dspbecnt Attributes working bay line Identifies the bay 1 or 2 and the number of the line The line number is from 1 to the highest numbered line on the back card For the range of line numbers on specific AXSM m...

Страница 214: ...port group and the maximum number of connections in that port group A port group consists of one to many physical lines This maximum connection count is a function of the hardware interface type OC 3 OC 12 and so on The port group information also shows the number of existing SVCs SPVCs and SPVPs Use the maximum number of supported connections to help you configure resource partitions If a particu...

Страница 215: ... Front Card Upper Card Lower Card Inserted Card PXM45 UI Stratum3 PXM HardDiskDrive Reserved Card PXM45 UI Stratum3 PXM HardDiskDrive State Active Active Active Serial Number SAK033600AN SBK044200J8 SAK0403005Q Prim SW Rev 2 1 60 8 P1 Sec SW Rev 2 1 60 8 P1 Cur SW Rev 2 1 60 8 P1 Boot FW Rev 2 1 60 8 P1 800 level Rev 12 A0 06 800 level Part 800 05983 01 800 05787 02 800 05052 03 CLEI Code 00000000...

Страница 216: ...ate Active Present Absent Serial Number SAK0350008L SAK0403004A Boot FW Rev 2 0 11 A1 SW Rev 2 0 1 D 800 level Rev M6 07 Orderable Part 800 5776 3 800 4819 1 PCA Part 73 4504 2 73 3845 1 Reset Reason On Power up Card SCT Id 2 Lines Ports Partitions SPVC SPVP SVC 2 2 2 10 0 10 Port Group 1 Chans supported 32512 Lines 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Port Group 2 Chans supported 32512 Lines 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 Port Grou...

Страница 217: ...s is the Revision level of the boot firmware Revision level of the system software Date and time of command execution including GMT offset Backplane serial number and its hardware revision level The IP address of the statistics master a workstation Type of card in the front and back slots and the active standby state of each Alarm status for each card and the shelf itself Redundancy configuration ...

Страница 218: ...edundancy Slot Card State Type Status Slot Type 01 Active Active AXSM_1OC48 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 02 Active Active AXSM_1OC48 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 03 Active Active AXSM_16OC3 NONE 04 PRIMARY SLOT 04 Standby Active AXSM_16OC3 NONE 03 SECONDARY SLOT 05 Active Active AXSM_4OC12 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 06 Active Active AXSM_4OC12 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 07 Active Active PXM45 NONE 08 PRIMARY SLOT 08 Stan...

Страница 219: ... contents of SCT number 2 and SCT 3 Note Currently the system does not support certain parameters in the service class templates SCTs so you can specify them through addcon cnfcon or Cisco WAN Manager These parameters are when applicable PCR SCR and ICR Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspcdsct parameter_group bw gen cosb vcThr cosThr Syntax Description parameter_group can be bw for ba...

Страница 220: ...00000000 00000001 00250000 00000000 ABR 00000010 00000000 01000000 00000001 00250000 00000000 CBR 2 00001000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00250000 00000000 CBR 3 00001000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00250000 00000000 Display the policing and CAC parameters parameter gen for SCT 2 To confirm that the current card level SCT is SCT 2 execute dspcd MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspcdsct gen Service Class Template 2 G...

Страница 221: ...06 0015 00000000 00000100 000 002 DISABLE 10 06 0016 00000000 00000100 000 000 DISABLE 10 06 Display VC thresholds for SCT 2 Note the following The Scaling COSB value applies to congestion in a Class of Service Buffer if a buffer gets congested this factor determines how quickly the node throttles back the rate at which cells enter the buffer The Scaling Log If is a scaling factor that applies to ...

Страница 222: ...000 0800000 1000000 000000015 0012 0000125 1000000 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 1000000 000000015 0013 0000126 1000000 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 1000000 000000015 0014 0000127 1000000 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 1000000 000000015 0015 0000128 1000000 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 1000000 000000015 0016 0000129 10000 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 1000000 000000015 Example SCT 3 Thi...

Страница 223: ...e Class of Service Buffer parameters for SCT 3 Note the following Min Rate and Max Rate do not apply in the current product Excess Priority is a scheme for distributing excess bandwidth The lowest number is the highest priority for a connection to receive excess bandwidth If two or more connections have equal priority the excess bandwidth is equally distributed between them Explicit Rate Stamping ...

Страница 224: ...s have occurred since the connection was first added by displaying SPVC Established If a failure occurred the Attempts field shows the number of times the system attempted to re establish service If no failures have occurred the Attempts field contains a 0 L Util and R Util are the local and remote percent of utilization assigned to the connection Currently the default of 100 is the only value Cos...

Страница 225: ...apply to a connection regardless of the administrative state The traffic management parameters consist of Local and remote UPC parameters of PCR MBS CTD CDVT and so on A 1 in a field means that the parameter was not specified The characters N A indicate that the parameter does not apply to the service type These other fields also pertain to connection integrity OAM connectivity check enable or dis...

Страница 226: ...0000101180500 1 01 05 31 63000 Remote NSAP Address port vpi vci S 4700918100000000107BE92F3F00000101180500 1 01 05 3201 100 Conn Type VCC Admn Status ADMN UP Service Type cbr1 Oper Status FAIL Controller 2 Local PCR 10000 Remote PCR 1000 Local SCR N A Remote SCR N A Local CDV 1 Remote CDV 1 Local CTD 1 Remote CTD 1 Local MBS N A Remote MBS N A Local CDVT 1 Remote CDVT 1 Admin weight 1 Frame discar...

Страница 227: ... Tx CDV N A Rx CDV N A Tx CTD N A Rx CTD N A Display information for vpi vci 10 100 on port ID 1 1 1 1 In this case port ID and remote and local NSAP addresses are the same so the connection is a DAXCON Also the Max Cost is 1 The Max Cost of 1 means no cost per link was specified for UBR service and therefore the Routing Cost is 0 node19 8 PXM a dspcon 1 1 1 1 10 100 Port Vpi Vci Owner State Local...

Страница 228: ...this number Identifier Identifies the connection in the format port vpi vci Type Shows whether the connection is a VCC or a VPC SrvcType The service type VBR and so on See addcon description M S Indicates whether the endpoint specified by Identifier is the master or slave Upld The hexadecimal Upload number is an encoded timestamp the Cisco WAN Manager application uses to determine when a connectio...

Страница 229: ... connection that you would like to serve as the starting connection in the display vci The VPI of the connection that you would like to serve as the starting connection in the display state A specific connection state The display shows only the connections with the state you specify Note that on the PXM45 you must spell out the entire state keyword The keywords for specifying a state are failed on...

Страница 230: ...801 00 Remote Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 6 1 1 1 200 100 6 2 1 3 200 200 OK SLAVE 6 1 1 1 100 200 6 1 1 1 100 100 OK MASTER Local Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 Remote Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 6 1 1 1 200 100 6 2 1 3 200 200 OK SLAVE Local Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 Remote Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 0000010...

Страница 231: ...all controller In this example the switch has only one controller PNNI The display also shows that the controller is internal slot 7 and has the optional user specified name PNNITWO Apart from controller information the display shows that no shelf alarms exist MGX8850 7 PXM a dspcontrollers MGX8850 System Rev 02 00 Jul 30 2000 09 39 36 GMT MGX8850 Shelf Alarm NONE Number of Controllers 1 Controlle...

Страница 232: ...se 2 Syntax dspfdr ifNum Syntax Description Card s on Which This Command Executes AXSM Related Commands addfdr delfdr dspfdrs Attributes Example MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspfdr 4 Feeder Interface Number 4 Feeder Name MGX8850 Feeder LAN IP Address 192 0 0 0 Feeder Network IP Address 0 0 0 0 Feeder Remote Shelf 1 Feeder Remote Slot 1 Feeder Remote Port 3 Feeder Type AXSM Feeder Model Number 8850 Feeder LMI ...

Страница 233: ...heir information For more detailed information on configuring a feeder see the Cisco MGX 8850 Switch Software Configuration Guide Release 2 Syntax dspfdrs Card s on Which This Command Executes AXSM Related Commands addfdr delfdr dspfdr Attributes Example MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspfdrs If Feeder Lan Net Rmt Rmt LMI LMI Feeder Name IP IP Slot Port Admin Oper Alarm 4 MGX8850 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 3 Up Up Cle...

Страница 234: ...ed in the dspports command report For more detailed information on configuring a feeder see the Cisco MGX 8850 Switch Software Configuration Guide Release 2 Syntax dspfdrstat ifNum Syntax Description Card s on Which This Command Executes AXSM Related Commands clrfdrstat Attributes Example MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspfdrstat 7 ifNum The interface number of the port on which to display the feeder statistics...

Страница 235: ...current AXSM MGX8850 11 AXSM a dspln ds3 1 1 Line Number 1 1 Admin Status Down Alarm Status Clear Line Type ds3cbitadm Number of ports 0 Line Coding ds3B3ZS Number of partitions 0 Line Length meters 0 Number of SPVC 0 OOFCriteria 3Of8Bits Number of SPVP 0 AIS c Bits Check Check Number of SVC 0 Loopback NoLoop Xmt Clock source localTiming Rcv FEAC Validation 4 out of 5 FEAC codes ds3 Command deline...

Страница 236: ... 2 1 Line Number 2 1 Admin Status Up Alarm Status Clear Loopback NoLoop APS enabled Disable Frame Scrambling Enable Number of ports 1 Xmt Clock source localTiming Number of partitions 1 Line Type sonetSts12c Number of SPVC 0 Medium Type SONET SDH SONET Number of SVC 4 Medium Time Elapsed 506223 Medium Valid Intervals 96 Medium Line Type ShortSMF Note When APS is enabled the alarm status line shows...

Страница 237: ...tus enabled or disabled Configured line length in meters applies to only T3 or E3 Criteria for Out of Frame OOF error applies to only T3 or E3 Whether C bit AIS checking is enabled applies to only T3 or E3 The medium line type long reach single mode fiber for example The alarm status clear critical and so on For information on an individual line use dspln Also the dspln command shows the transmit ...

Страница 238: ...amble Coding Type 1 1 Down sonetSts48c NoLoop Enable Other ShortSingleMode Display the configuration of each T3 line on the current AXSM 16 T3E3 MGX8850 7 AXSM a dsplns Line Line Line Line Length OOF AIS Num State Type Lpbk meters Criteria c BitsCheck 1 1 Up ds3m23plcp PayloadLoop 0 fBits3Of8 Check 1 2 Down ds3cbitadm NoLoop 0 fBits3Of8 Check 1 3 Down ds3cbitadm NoLoop 0 fBits3Of8 Check 1 4 Down d...

Страница 239: ...n a resource partition the display shows the configured bandwidth and connection numbers and what has actually been utilized Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspload ifNum partId Syntax Description Related Commands dsprscprtn addcon dspcons dspcon cnfcon Attributes ifNum Logical interface port number For AXSM the range is 1 60 partId The partition identifier The range is 1 5 If necessa...

Страница 240: ...0100 Igr Maximum Bandwidth 1412830 Igr Guaranteed Bandwidth 1412830 Egr Maximum Bandwidth 1412830 Egr Guaranteed Bandwidth 1412830 Available Igr Channels 0000999 Available Egr Channels 0000999 Available Igr Bandwidth 1410830 Available Egr Bandwidth 1410830 E X C E P T V A L U E S SERV CATEG VAR TYPE INGRESS EGRESS VSI SIG Avl Chnl 0000999 0000999 CBR Avl Chnl 0000999 0000999 VBR RT Avl Chnl 000099...

Страница 241: ...des control VCs when you execute dsppart on the CLI of a service module However when you execute dspcd or dsppnport s on the CLI of the controller card the display does not include control VCs The total number of connections in the display includes control VCs The types of control VCs are SSCOP PNNI RCC and ILMI if ILMI is enabled To see the connection counts that do not include control VCs use ds...

Страница 242: ...ical port 1 of the current AXSM MGX8850 1 AXSM a dsppart 1 1 Interface Number 1 Partition Id 1 Number of SPVC 0 Controller Id 2 Number of SPVP 0 egr Guaranteed bw 0001percent 1000000 Number of SVC 2 egr Maximum bw 0001percent 1000000 ing Guaranteed bw 0001percent 1000000 ing Maximum bw 0001percent 1000000 min vpi 0 max vpi 4095 min vci 33 max vci 65535 guaranteed connections 1000 maximum connectio...

Страница 243: ...n use either command Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspparts Related Commands addpart delpart cnfpart dsppart Attributes Example Display all resource partitions on the current AXSM card MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspparts if part Ctlr egr egr ingr ingr min max min max min max Num ID ID GuarBw MaxBw GuarBw MaxBw vpi vpi vci vci conn conn 0001 0001 0001 0001 1 1 2 1000000 1000000 1000000 1000000...

Страница 244: ...VCs are SSCOP PNNI RCC and ILMI if ILMI is enabled To see the connection counts that do not include control VCs use dsppnport Note The SCT ID that dspport shows pertains to the port For the card level SCT ID use dspcd Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspport ifNum Syntax Description Related Commands addport dnport dspports Attributes ifNum A logical port interface number Only one logic...

Страница 245: ... dspport Example Display the port configuration for logical port 2 on the current AXSM MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspport 2 Interface Number 2 Line Number 2 1 Admin State Up Operational State Up Guaranteed bandwidth cells sec 100000 Number of partitions 1 Maximum bandwidth cells sec 100000 Number of SPVC 0 ifType NNI Number of SVC 4 SCT Id 3 VPI number VNNI only 0 ...

Страница 246: ...er second The ID of the port level SCT see addport The VPI number applies only where virtual NNIs are available Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspports Related Commands addport cnfport delport dspport Attributes Examples Display the logical ports on the current AXSM Note that if no SCT file had been specified for a particular logical port ifNum the output gives a warning about the de...

Страница 247: ...s SCTs so you can specify them through addcon cnfcon or Cisco WAN Manager These parameters are when applicable PCR SCR and ICR Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM AXSM Syntax dspportsct parameter_group ifnum AXSM Syntax Description Related Commands addport cnfport delport dspport Attributes parameter_group An aspect of the SCT for display bw for bandwidth gen for policing and CAC cosb vcThr for ...

Страница 248: ... 00000000 00000001 00250000 00000000 CBR 3 00001000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00250000 00000000 Display the policing and CAC parameters parameter gen for SCT 2 To confirm that the current card level SCT is SCT 2 run the dspcd command MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspportsct gen 2 Service Class Template 2 General Parameters SERV TYPE COSB_NUM CAC_TYPE UPC_ENB CLP SELEC GCRA 1 GCRA 2 CI CNTRL VSI SIG 00000016 B...

Страница 249: ...WAN Manager application or the CLI commands MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspportsct cosb 2 Service Class Template 02 COSB Parameters COSB MIN RATE MAX RATE MIN PRIORITY EXCESS PRIORITY ERS ENABLE CLR 0001 00000000 00000100 000 002 DISABLE 10 06 0002 00000000 00000100 000 002 DISABLE 10 06 0003 00000000 00000100 000 000 DISABLE 10 10 0004 00000000 00000100 000 001 DISABLE 10 08 0005 00000000 00000100 000 001 D...

Страница 250: ...0000 0600000 0800000 0000004 0000004 UBR 2 011 DSB 0000050000 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 0000004 0000004 ABR 012 DSB 0000050000 0200000 0800000 0600000 0800000 0000003 0000003 CBR 2 013 DSB 0000002500 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 0000001 0000001 CBR 3 014 DSB 0000002500 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 0000001 0000001 Display the Class of Service Thresholds for SCT 2 Note The two random ear...

Страница 251: ...00250000 00000000 ABR 00000010 00000000 01000000 00000001 00250000 00000000 CBR 2 00001000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00250000 00000000 CBR 3 00001000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00250000 00000000 Display the general parameters for SCT 3 MGX8850 9 AXSM a dspportsct gen 3 Service Class Template 3 General Parameters SERV TYPE COSB_NUM CAC_TYPE UPC_ENB CLP SELEC GCRA 1 GCRA 2 CI CNTRL VSI SIG 00000016...

Страница 252: ...015 00000000 00000100 000 002 DISABLE 10 06 0016 00000000 00000100 000 000 DISABLE 10 06 Display VC thresholds for SCT 3 Note the following The Scaling COSB value applies to congestion in a Class of Service Buffer if a buffer becomes congested this value determines how quickly the node throttles back the rate that cells enter the buffer The Scaling Log If is a scaling factor that applies to conges...

Страница 253: ...0 1000000 000000015 0009 0000026 1000000 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 1000000 000000015 0010 0000027 1000000 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 1000000 000000015 0011 0000028 1000000 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 1000000 000000015 0012 0000029 1000000 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 1000000 000000015 0013 0000030 1000000 1000000 0800000 0600000 0800000 1000000 000000015 0014 0000031 1000000 1000...

Страница 254: ... requires a Service Resource Module SRM in the switch The current release does not support SRMs Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspred Related Commands addred delred switchredcd Attributes Example MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspred MGX8850 Node Alarm CRITICAL Primary Primary Primary Secondary Secondary Secondary Redundancy SlotNum Type State SlotNum Type State Type 7 PXM45 Active 8 PXM45 Empty ...

Страница 255: ...ntrol VCs when you execute dsprscprtn on the CLI of a service module However when you execute dspcd or dsppnport s on the CLI of the controller card the display does not include control VCs The total number of connections in the display includes control VCs The types of control VCs are SSCOP PNNI RCC and ILMI if ILMI is enabled To see the connection counts that do not include control VCs use dsppn...

Страница 256: ...t 1 of the current AXSM MGX8850 1 AXSM a dsprscprtn 1 1 Interface Number 1 Partition Id 1 Number of SPVC 0 Controller Id 2 Number of SPVP 0 egr Guaranteed bw 0001percent 1000000 Number of SVC 2 egr Maximum bw 0001percent 1000000 ing Guaranteed bw 0001percent 1000000 ing Maximum bw 0001percent 1000000 min vpi 0 max vpi 4095 min vci 33 max vci 65535 guaranteed connections 1000 maximum connections 32...

Страница 257: ...use either command Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dsprscprtns Related Commands addrscprtn delrscprtn cnfrscprtn dsprscprtn Attributes Example Display all resource partitions on the current card MGX8850 1 AXSM a dsprscprtns if part Ctlr egr egr ingr ingr min max min max min max Num ID ID GuarBw MaxBw GuarBw MaxBw vpi vpi vci vci conn conn 0001 0001 0001 0001 1 1 2 1000000 1000000 1000...

Страница 258: ...ar SCT template A section within the SCT see Syntax Description for an explanation Note Currently the system does not support certain parameters in the service class templates SCTs so you can specify them through addcon cnfcon or Cisco WAN Manager These parameters are when applicable PCR SCR and ICR Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM AXSM Syntax dspsct SCT_section sctID egr ing AXSM Syntax Desc...

Страница 259: ...o MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 3 Equipment and Resource Provisioning dspsct Attributes Log log State active standby Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 260: ...6 AXSM a dspcdsct gen 4 ing Service Class Template 0 General Parameters SERV TYPE COSB_NUM BOOK_FACT CAC_TYPE UPC_ENB 000000256 00000003 000000100 ECAC A GCRA1 ENB 000000257 00000004 000000100 ECAC A GCRA 1 2 000000258 00000004 000000100 B CAC GCRA 1 2 000000259 00000004 000000100 B CAC GCRA 1 2 000000260 00000005 000000100 ECAC A GCRA 1 2 000000261 00000005 000000100 B CAC GCRA 1 2 000000262 0000...

Страница 261: ...001 0000001 266 235 DSB 00000160 100 035 080 100 0000001 0000001 267 236 DSB 00000160 100 035 080 100 0000001 0000001 MGX8850 6 AXSM a dspcdsct cosThr 4 ing Service Class Template 00 COSB Threshold Parameters COSB COSBTHRES MAX_CELL EFCI CLP_LO CLP_HI EPD0 RED RED PROB TBL IDX THRESH Pct EPDPct Pct Pct PCT FACTOR 0001 00114 00001424 100 080 060 100 025 00000005 0002 00115 00001424 100 080 060 100 ...

Страница 262: ...ts and channels and the number of maximum lines ports and channels in the format active maximum For example 1 60 indicates that 1 port is active and that the maximum possible ports is 60 Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dsptotals Syntax Description Attributes Example MGX8850 2 AXSM a dsptotals total active lines 2 16 total active ports 0 60 total active chans 0 130560 No Parameters Log...

Страница 263: ...cnt Attributes Example MGX8850 9 AXSM a switchapsln 1 1 1 3 1 bay The working bay number to switch line The working line number to switch switchOption The method of performing the switch 1 clear returns to working line 2 lockout of protection locks out the specified APS pair from being switched to protection line 3 forced working protection forces a working line to protection line switch unless th...

Страница 264: ...es operation from the active redundant card to standby redundant card Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax switchredcd fromSlot toSlot Syntax Description Related Command dspred delred Attributes Example mgx8850a 7 PXM a switchredcd 8 7 fromSlot The currently active redundant card toSlot The current standby redundant card which is being switched to active Log no log State active Privilege ...

Страница 265: ...lmi uplmi Up Local Management Interface Activates the Local Management Interface LMI on the specified logical port ifNum Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax uplmi ifNum Syntax Description Related Commands dnlmi Attributes Example uplmi 2 ifNum The interface number of the logical port on which to activate the LMI Log log State active Privilege GROUP1 ...

Страница 266: ...signaling and so on Note See description of cnfcdsct for important planning considerations before you use upln Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax upln bay line Syntax Description Related Commands dspln dsplns cnfln dnln Attributes Example Activate line 1 in bay 1 MGX8850 1 AXSM a upln 1 1 bay line Identifies the bay 1 or 2 and the number of the line The line number is from 1 to the highe...

Страница 267: ...ains intact whether the logical port is a UNI or an NNI The routes for connections vary by interface type After you re enable an NNI port through upport you cannot return the re routed connections to the upped port The PXM45 routes connections over the trunk as needed On a UNI the connections continue to exist but remain in the failed state until you enable the port by executing upport Syntax uppo...

Страница 268: ...3 108 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 3 Equipment and Resource Provisioning upport ...

Страница 269: ...keyword driven parameters does not matter although any preceding or succeeding position dependent parameters must appear as they do in the command syntax description In the following syntax example the command is to delete more than one connection at a time The mandatory position dependent connection identifier consist of a logical port ifNum and the VPI and VCI of the first connection to delete A...

Страница 270: ...s sequence AXSM Format On a service module you identify the follow when you provision the capabilities of the card Slot Bay Line Logical port Port group Resource partition Not all of these elements correspond to elements you specify on the PXM45 Subsequent paragraphs describe only the common elements that are visible on the CLI of the PXM and the service module The preceding elements are further d...

Страница 271: ... 2 so the PNNI logical port number would be 16848898 Where needed the descriptions in the PNNI command chapter define the need for this logical port number This section does not define a PNNI logical port number nor does it describe the correspondence between an AXSM port and a PNNI logical port number For the correspondence between a PNNI physical port and the port identifier on an AXSM see Table...

Страница 272: ...dspprfx delprfx Attributes Examples Add prefix47 0091 8100 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 to PNNI physical port 3 1 1 1 Display ATM address prefixes for this port Only the one just added exists M8850_NY 7 PXM a addprfx 3 1 1 1 47 0091 8100 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 M8850_NY 7 PXM a dspprfx 3 1 1 1 ILMI Configured Port Prefix es 47 0091 8100 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 M8850_NY 7 PXM a portid The portid is the PNNI physica...

Страница 273: ...ibutes Examples Clear the ILMI statistics for logical interface 1 resource partition 1 Before doing so confirm the existence of these entities by running the dspparts command pop20two 1 AXSM a dspparts if part Ctlr egr egr ingr ingr min max min max min max Num ID ID GuarBw MaxBw GuarBw MaxBw vpi vpi vci vci conn conn 0001 0001 0001 0001 1 1 2 10000 10000 10000 10000 10 100 100 1000 0 10 pop20two 1...

Страница 274: ...for backward compatibility The peer must support address registration so you must confirm that address registration is enabled on all three places Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfaddrreg portid yes no Syntax Description In addition to typing a port ID you must also type either yes or no The default is yes Related Commands None Attributes Examples Disable ILMI address registration ...

Страница 275: ... With auto configuration disabled the ILMI slave does not start ATM layer parameter negotiation while ports come up Instead the ILMI slave uses the local configuration parameters The default state for auto configuration is enabled Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfautocnf portid yes no Syntax Description Attributes Examples Enable ILMI auto configuration on port 4 1 1 11 Geneva 1 AX...

Страница 276: ...mi ilmiEnable vpi vpi vci vci trap ilmiTrapEnable s keepAliveInt t pollingIntervalT491 k pollInctFact Syntax Description Related Commands dspilmi dspilmis dspilmicnt clrilmicnt dnilmi upilmi Attributes ifNum Logical port number On an AXSM the range is 1 60 id Partition ID in the range 1 5 See description of addpart or addrscprtn for information regarding resource partition ID ilmi Enable or disabl...

Страница 277: ...co MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 4 ILMI Commands cnfilmi Example Unknown 1 AXSM a cnfilmi 1 id 1 ilmi 1 vpi 40 vci 99 s 10 t 10 k 10 ...

Страница 278: ...I port Prior to cnfilmienable you must use dnpnport to de activate the port Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfilmienable portid yes no Syntax Description Related Commands uppnport dsppnport dsppnilmi Attributes portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 4 2 Log log State active Privilege GROUP1 ...

Страница 279: ... 1 1 2 Port Type PNNI Side symmetric Autoconfig enable UCSM disable Secure Link Protocol enable Change of Attachment Point Procedures enable Modification of Local Attributes Standard Procedure enable Addressreg Permit All VPI 0 VCI 16 Max Prefix 16 Total Prefix 0 Max Address 64 Total Address 0 Resync State 0 Node Prefix yes Peer Port Id 16848898 System_Id 0 192 0 0 0 0 Peer Addressreg enable Peer ...

Страница 280: ...securelink to make PNNI release the call if it loses connection to the ILMI slave no do not enable the ILMI Secure link protocol yes disable the ILMI Secure link protocol Default yes attachmentpoint Sets the flag attachmentpoint to make PNNI release the call if the slave ILMI session sees changes in peer information such as the system name or system ID no do not enable the detection of loss of att...

Страница 281: ...uting Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 4 ILMI Commands cnfilmiproto Examples SanJose 7 PXM a cnfilmiproto 11 2 1 1 securelink no attachmentpoint no modlocalattrstd yes ...

Страница 282: ... Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dbgilmi enable disable portid log vsi func minor major warning error dump fatal all dbg vsi func minor major warning error dump fatal all Syntax Description Attributes enable disable Activate or de activate debugging dbgilmi portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 4 2 log vsi func mino...

Страница 283: ...elated Commands addprfx dspprfx Attributes Examples Delete ATM prefix 47 0091 8100 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 from PNNI physical port 3 1 1 1 Display prefixes for this port M8850_NY 7 PXM a delprfx 3 1 1 1 47 0091 8100 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 M8850_NY 7 PXM a dspprfx 3 1 1 1 INFO No Prefix registered M8850_NY 7 PXM a portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport Se...

Страница 284: ...a logical port so you can modify a configuration troubleshoot or run certain commands that require ILMI to be inoperative Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dnilmi ifNum partId Syntax Description Related Commands dspilmi dspilmis upilmi Attributes ifNum Logical port number On an AXSM the range is 1 60 partId The range for partition identifier is 1 5 Log log State active standby Privilege...

Страница 285: ...This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspilmi ifNum partId Syntax Description Related Commands cnfilmi dspilmis dspilmicnt clrilmicnt Attributes Examples This example show the dspilmi command line on the AXSM card pinnacle3 1 2 AXSM a dspilmi 1 1 Sig rsrc Ilmi Sig Sig Ilmi S Keepalive T conPoll K conPoll Port Part State Vpi Vci Trap Interval Interval InactiveFactor 1 1 Off 0 16 On 1 5 4 pinnacle3 2 AXSM a...

Страница 286: ...peer via the ILMI address registration mechanism Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspilmiaddr portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfilmienable cnfilmiproto dsppnilmi pntraceilmi Attributes Examples Display the ILMI address on port 3 2 2 4 8850_NY 7 PXM a dspilmiaddr 3 2 2 4 INFO No ilmi address registered portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot sub...

Страница 287: ...counters for logical port 1 partition ID 1 on the current AXSM card M8850_NY 1 AXSM a dspilmicnt 1 1 If Number 1 Partition Id 1 SNMP Pdu Received 1219596 GetRequest Received 609802 GetNext Request Received 0 SetRequest Received 0 Cold Start Trap Received 0 GetResponse Received 609794 GetResponse Transmitted 609802 GetRequest Transmitted 609794 Cold Start Trap Transmitted 1 VPC Trap Transmitted 0 V...

Страница 288: ...es ILMIs on the service module Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspilmis Related Commands cnfilmi dspilmi dspilmicnt Attributes Examples Display all ILMIs on the current service module pop20two 1 AXSM a dspilmis Sig rsrc Ilmi Sig Sig Ilmi S Keepalive T conPoll K conPoll Port Part State Vpi Vci Trap Interval Interval InactiveFactor 1 2 On 0 16 On 1 5 4 2 2 Off 0 16 On 1 5 4 3 2 Off 0 16...

Страница 289: ...c adds to the bandwidth load on the port Use dspload to determine the load on port resources Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnilmi portid Syntax Description Related Commands dspilmi Attributes Disable Protocol is not enabled on this port NotApplicable This port is not accessible due to hardware related conditions LostConnectivity Protocol on listening port is not enabled EnableNo...

Страница 290: ...hange of Attachment Point Procedures enable Modification of Local Attributes Standard Procedure enable Addressreg disable VPI 0 VCI 0 Max Prefix 0 Total Prefix 0 Max Address 0 Total Address 0 Resync State 0 Node Prefix no Peer Port Id 0 System_Id 0 0 0 0 0 0 Peer Addressreg disable Peer Ip Address 0 0 0 0 Peer Interface Name ILMI Link State Disable ILMI Version ilmi40 INFO No Prefix registered INF...

Страница 291: ...x dspprfx portid Syntax Description Related Commands addprfx delprfx Attributes Examples Display all ILMI address prefixes for port 4 1 1 11 SanJose 7 PXM a dspprfx 4 1 1 11 ILMI Configured Port Prefix es 47 0091 8100 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 88 8888 8888 0000 0000 0000 0000 SanJose 7 PXM a portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format pa...

Страница 292: ...e cnfilmi command Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax upilmi ifNum partId Syntax Description Related Commands cnfilmi dspilmi Attributes Example Determine whether ILMI is up on logical port 1 resource partition 1 If ILMI is down or off activate it by using the upilmi command Note the second time you run the dspilmi command the ILMI state appears as on M8850_NY 5 AXSME a dspilmi 1 1 Sig rs...

Страница 293: ...lease 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 4 ILMI Commands upilmi M8850_NY 5 AXSM a dspilmi 1 1 Sig rsrc Ilmi Sig Sig Ilmi S Keepalive T conPoll K conPoll Port Part State Vpi Vci Trap Interval Interval InactiveFactor 1 1 On 0 16 Off 1 5 4 ...

Страница 294: ...4 26 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 4 ILMI Commands upilmi ...

Страница 295: ...ignaling commands see the chapter Logical Node Port and Signaling Commands The commands in this chapter have the following applications Configuration Link selection Node addresses and identifiers Packet size PNNI interface PNNI timers RCC variables Routing policies Scope map table PNNI summary address Deleting A logical node A PNNI summary address Displays of Debug information Learned nodes Link i...

Страница 296: ... descriptions point out where you should modify common fields The following fields also go into the construction of the ATM addresses and PNNI related identifiers The Initial Domain Identifier IDI identifies the domain The Initial Domain Part IDP identifies the country The Authority and Format Identifier AFI identifies the address format and who provided it The Data Country Code DCC identifies the...

Страница 297: ...verbose 1 0 Command Entry When you enter a command with the current version of the product you must type all intended arguments before you press the Return key or Enter key If you press the Return key or Enter key with incorrect parameters or no parameters if the command requires parameters a message displays the syntax and parameter ranges The returned message may also suggest what the problem is...

Страница 298: ...sts prerequisite commands or tasks For more details on the sequence of tasks refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Software Configuration Guide Release 2 0 for more details of this sequence AXSM Format On a service module you identify the follow when you provision the capabilities of the card Slot Bay Line Logical port Port group Resource partition Not all of these elements correspond to elem...

Страница 299: ...oes not directly correspond to the For each physical port number PNNI also generates a logical port number as an encrypted form of the physical port number The logical port number appears as an unformatted numerical string For example a PNNI physical port ID may have the form 1 1 2 2 so the PNNI logical port number would be 16848898 Where needed the descriptions in the PNNI command chapter define ...

Страница 300: ...he release The PNNI node identifier ID defines the logical node on the switch As the Syntax Description explains the node ID consists of numerous fields see Figure 5 1 A peer group identifier defines the nodes in a peer group within a network Logical nodes on more than one physical switch can belong to a peer group The sections that follow define the preceding fields Refer to the description of cn...

Страница 301: ...l node AESA ping is 99 Note For information on port level ATM addresses see the description of addaddr Figure 5 2 Switch Level ATM Address PNNI Logical Node Identifier A PNNI logical node identifier node ID consists of A number that indicates the level for the logical node within a hierarchy The current release supports only one level The length of the ATM address for the node ID An ATM address th...

Страница 302: ...uely identify the peer group Figure 5 4 Peer Group Identifier Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax addpnni node level lowest other atmAddr atm address nodeId node id pgId pg id enable true false transitRestricted on off complexNode on off branchingRestricted on off 47 1 1 1 of Bytes 2 1 1 3 6 6 ATM address format 00 56 160 91 81 00 00 00 XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX 00 57115 Cisco ...

Страница 303: ...default of lowest If you are adding the node at the lowest level of the switch you must also specify atmAdd atm address Default lowest atmAddr The ATM address of a PNNI logical node consists of 20 hexadecimal 8 bit bytes 2 hexadecimal characters per byte If you are adding the lowest node in the switch you must include an ATM address For all levels above the lowest level this ATM address is meaning...

Страница 304: ...e PNNI protocol but not be ready to enable Later you can enable it by executing cnfpnni node enable true true Enable this logical node false Disable this logical node Default true transitRestricted Specifies whether this node can act as a transit node You can restrict transit to secure the node or to minimize the traffic on a node that either has low capacity or is high priority on Allow calls to ...

Страница 305: ... identifier is 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f1f1 00309409f1f1 01 The peer group ID is 56 47 009181 0000 00 The number of bytes specified by the level parameter is 7 level 56 Therefore with the level itself requiring 1 byte and the pg id having 7 bytes the total is 8 bytes As dsppnni node shows the system adds 0s for the remaining 6 bytes The node is enabled The node permits traffic to cross it on...

Страница 306: ...range Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax addpnni summary addr node index address prefix prefix length type internal exterior suppress true false Syntax Description The defaults for address prefixes and the peer group ID share values with the ATM address If you change the peer group ID pgId you should change the corresponding fields in the PNNI summary address See Figure 5 5 Figure 5 5 C...

Страница 307: ...fault is the first 13 bytes of the atm addr prefixlength Specify the length of the address prefix in bits The range is 1 152 bits You configure PNNI routing to look at a specific length in the address so the length of the PNNI summary address is also configurable For example if you configure a node with an 88 bit PNNI summary address that node sets up a call from any addresses that matches the fir...

Страница 308: ...100 0000 0030 9409 f1f1 The length of the PNNI summary address is 104 bits This PNNI summary address contains only internal addresses This PNNI summary address has no advertising suppression it is advertised Use dsppnni summary addr to display the PNNI address prefixes SanJose 7 PXM a addpnni summary addr 1 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 9409 f1f1 104 type internal suppress false SanJose 7 PXM a dsppnni s...

Страница 309: ...ping command don t specify anything except the execution of the command itself All behaviors started by the command stop when the interval timeout expires Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax aesa_ping destination address setupcall yes no qos ubr abr cbr trace yes no data enable disable timeout time out in secs interval time pcr peak cell rate scr sustain cell rate Syntax Description dest...

Страница 310: ...ent with the ping The data packets cease when the interval specified by timeout elapses yes The data packets are sent no No data packets are sent Default disable timeout Specify the connection timeout for ping Any selected ping options also terminate when the interval specified by timeout elapses Range 5 120 seconds Default 5 seconds interval Specify the interval between successive transmissions R...

Страница 311: ...g The ping waits six seconds for a reply The ping re occurs every 60 seconds unless it finishes The peak cell rate of the ping is five cells per second cps The sustained cell rate of the ping is five cps SanJose 7 PXM a aesa_ping 47 00918100000000d058ac23ac 00d058ac23ac 01 setupcall no qos ubr trace no data disable timeout 6 interval 60 pcr 5 scr 5 Ping Got CLI message index 0 PING from PNNI SOURC...

Страница 312: ...l of the hierarchy For example if three levels exist three PGL elections occur To ensure that a node cannot win the PGL election you can assign 0 for the priority Every node in a peer group runs the election algorithm with one exception a node with the Non Transit for PGL E ection Flag set In addition to the priority cnfpnni election lets you specify the Number of seconds that the node delays adve...

Страница 313: ...in a peer group Range 1 20 Default 0 initTime Specify the number of seconds that this node delays advertising its choice of preferred PGL Default 15 seconds overrideDelay Specify the number of seconds that this PNNI node waits to be declared the preferred PGL by unanimous agreement among its peer group members Default 30 seconds reelectionTime After losing connectivity to the current PGL specify t...

Страница 314: ...0 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 5 PNNI Commands cnfpnni election Example In the current release this command has no meaning ...

Страница 315: ...o logical links One link would correspond to aggregation token 0 and the other link would correspond to aggregation token 1 In summary An aggregation token is the number of links between a peer group leader and the lowest level of a PNNI hierarchy The range for tokens is 1 32 Administrative Weight The administrative weight AW is a number that serves as a cost based determinant of a route Each port...

Страница 316: ...ing awcbr Specify the administrative weight for constant bit rate CBR on this interface Range 0 4194304 Default 5040 awrtvbr Specify the administrative weight for real time variable bit rate rt VBR on this interface Range 0 4194304 Default 5040 awnrtvbr Specify the administrative weight for non real time variable bit rate nrt VBR on this interface Range 0 4194304 Default 5040 awabr Specify the adm...

Страница 317: ...ides the AW for an individual class The AW parameter influences how PNNI selects a path within a peer group and therefore how it distributes SVCs and SPVCs PNNI route selection can also use AW to exclude certain links from routing For example it can define a backup link for use only when insufficient bandwidth is available on the primary link Related Commands dsppnni intf Attributes Example Specif...

Страница 318: ...ative weight AW The AW is a numeric value that every logical port ingress has The total cost of a route is the sum of all ingress port AWs in both directions of the route The minaw policy is the default maxavcr The routing protocol selects the link with the largest available cell rate AvCR The AvCR is the remaining bandwidth after the total utilized bandwidth is subtracted from the maximum cell ra...

Страница 319: ... as the routing policy for the link with port ID 4 1 1 11 Use dsppnni link selection to see the link selection policy on this port Note that dsppnni link selection shows the logical port number for the physical port ID SanJose 7 PXM a cnfpnni link selection 4 1 1 11 maxavcr SanJose 7 PXM a dsppnni link selection 4 1 1 11 physical port id 4 1 1 11 link selection maxavcr logical port id 17045515 San...

Страница 320: ...ies primarily to internetwork compatibility you can also use it in trials to test the affect of various packet sizes on the performance of the peer group Use dsppnni mtu to display the PNNI packet size configuration Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfpnni mtu mtu Syntax Description Related Commands dsppnni mtu Attributes Example This example shows the cnfpnni mtu command line that sp...

Страница 321: ...r group ID requires the node to be disabled Whether the node is the lowest node in the hierarchy The state of the node enabled or disabled Whether connections can transit this node Whether or not the node is complex Whether the node supports point to multipoint connections The preceding parameters appear as optional parameters in the syntax The only required parameter for this command is the local...

Страница 322: ...TM address for this logical node For you to change the ATM address the node must be disabled For details see the section Disabling a Node When Required Note that only the lowest node in the hierarchy requires an ATM address Default Figure 5 6 shows the factory set default level This parameter specifies the level of the node within the PNNI hierarchy The level of the node is the number of bits in t...

Страница 323: ...l The level is either the existing number of bits or whatever you specify with level level The default value of level is 56 7 bytes which specifies the length of pgId to 7 bytes However the maximum length of pgId is 14 bytes so display commands always show pgId as 14 bytes with trailing zeros filling the undefined fields If you increase the value of level you change the length and therefore the va...

Страница 324: ... in the ATM address and node identifier See Figure 5 6 for the mapping between these addresses complexNode Specify whether this node is a complex node The lowest level node cannot be a complex node on This node is a complex node off This node is not a complex node Default off Note This release does not support multiple peer groups so this parameter must remain off branchingRestricted Specify wheth...

Страница 325: ...in Figure 5 6 Related Commands addpnni node delpnni node dsppnni node addaddr Attributes Example This example shows the cnfpnni node command line that specifies the PNNI configuration values for a node that already exists on the network The command line configures the PNNI node as follows The PNNI hierarchy level is 56 The node ATM address is 47 0091 8100000000309409f1f1 00309409f1f1 01 The node P...

Страница 326: ...level 56 nodeId 56 160 47 0091 81000000 00309409f1f1 00309409f1f1 01 atmAddr 47 0091 81000000 00309409f1f1 00309409f1f1 01 pgId 56 47 00 9181 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 lowest true enable true transitRestricted on complexNode off branchingRestricted off SanJose 7 PXM a dsppnni node node index 1 node name SanJose Level 56 Lowest true Restricted transit on Complex node off Branching restricted off Admin...

Страница 327: ...cuting this command while the node carries little or no live traffic If you execute cnfpnni pkttrace while live traffic is present you may want to consider tracing the packets for one direction at a time transmit or receive If you plan to use the optional portId parameter but do not have the logical format of the port ID use dsppnport For details refer to the Syntax Description of cnfpnni pkttrace...

Страница 328: ...4 PNNI tx_packet on port 17504 at level 56 01 00010064 01010100 000038a0 47009181 00000000 309409f3 b8003094 02 09f3b801 47009181 00000000 309409f3 b8003094 09f3b801 38470091 03 81000000 00000000 000038a0 47009181 00000000 001a531c 2a00001a Geneva 7 PXM a dsppnni pkttrace tx portId 17504 Node Index 1 Port id 17504 Tx Pkt Trace on Geneva 7 PXM a portId The port ID in this instance has the format of...

Страница 329: ...p a PNNI topology state packet carries the formation to each node so it can update its IDB The background routing tables are updated to reflect the change in routing parameters Routing tables are generated or pre computed to support routing based on the shortest path The administrative weight AW background routing table stores the AWs for all routes The cell transfer delay CTD background routing t...

Страница 330: ...n 1 06 3 4 the total AWs along both directions of the route must be within 3 125 5 9 the total AWs along both directions of the route must be within 6 25 10 15 the total AWs along both directions of the route must be within 12 5 16 20 the total AWs along both directions of the route must be within 25 0 Range 0 20 Default 0 which means the cost of two paths must be identical to qualify as equal cos...

Страница 331: ...e routes Default no default onDemand On demand routing applies to crankback or a situation where the node must route a call to a destination for which no route exists in the pre computed routing tables The on demand policy is either firstfit and bestfit With firstfit the default PNNI selects the first route to the destination This approach minimizes search time but may not result in the best route...

Страница 332: ...wBgTable on ctdBgTable on cdvBgTable on Geneva 7 PXM a dsppnni routing policy SPT epsilon 0 Load balance random SPT holddown time 1 On demand routing best fit SPT path holddown time 2 AW Background Table on CTD Background Table on CDV Background Table on Geneva 7 PXM a ctdBgTable Enable or disable the background routing table of CTD The CTD parameter is the interval between a cell exiting the sour...

Страница 333: ...is function requires support of UNI 4 0 and therefore is not supported in this release Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfpnni scope map scope level Syntax Description Related Commands dsppnni scope map scope Specify the UNI 4 0 address scope Range 1 15 where 1 LocalNetwork 2 LocalNetworkPlusOne 3 LocalNetworkPlusTwo 4 SiteMinusOne 5 IntraSite 6 SitePlusOne 7 OrganizationMinusOne 8 I...

Страница 334: ...itch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 5 PNNI Commands cnfpnni scope map Attributes Example This command is not supported by the current release Log log State active Privilege SUPER_GP ...

Страница 335: ...itTime init time retryTime retry time callingIntegrityTime calling integrity time calledIntegrityTime called integrity time Syntax Description node index In the current release the only supported value for node index 1 The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within a multi peer group on the switch The range is 1 10 and the lowest level is 1 Range 1 10 Default 1 initTime The...

Страница 336: ...e number of seconds the node waits while it attempts to set up an SVCC as the calling party If the SVCC is not fully established within this time period the node tears down the connection Range 5 300 Default 300 calledIntegrityTime The number of seconds the node waits while it attempts to set up an SVCC as the called party If the SVCC is not fully established within this time period the node tears...

Страница 337: ... inactivity factor horizontalLinkInactivityTime horizontal link inactivity time ptseRefreshInterval ptse refresh interval ptseLifetimeFactor ptse lifetime factor retransmitInterval retransmit interval ptseDelayedAckInterval ptse delayed ack interval avcrPm avcr pm avcrMt avcr mt cdvPm cdv pm ctdPm ctd pm Syntax Description node index In the current release the only supported value for node index 1...

Страница 338: ...s ptseRefreshInterval Specify the initial time allowed for the PTSE to re originate specified in seconds Range 30 1800 seconds Default 1800 seconds ptseLifetimeFactor Specify the value for the lifetime multiplier expressed as a percentage The product of it and the ptse refresh interval is the initial value of the remaining lifetime of a self created PTSE Range 101 1000 per cent Default 200 retrans...

Страница 339: ...s should only be made be network experts Related Commands dsppnni timer Attributes avcrMt Specify the minimum threshold used in the algorithms that determine significant change for available cell rate AvCR parameters which are expressed as a percentage You can change this value to minimize the overhead created by advertisements triggered by AVCR changes avcr mt is expressed as a percentage Range 1...

Страница 340: ...lgorithm by 50 to determine the value that qualifies as the minimum threshold for significant change of AvCR parameters The node multiplies an algorithm by 25 to determine the value that qualifies as a significant change for CDV parameters The node multiplies an algorithm by 50 to determine the value that qualifies as a significant change for CTD parameters You can confirm your settings with the r...

Страница 341: ...on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dbgpnni all on off hello on off election on off nbr on off itf on off timer on off lgn on off spt on off nodereachability on off address on off itdb on off ra on off cp on off linkselection on off Syntax Description all Specify whether all types of debug messages go to the console on All types of debug messages go to the console off Only the debug message ty...

Страница 342: ...whether the interface FSM debug messages go to the console on The interface FSM messages go to the console off The interface FSM debug messages do not go to the console Default none address Specify whether the debug messages for address handling go to the console on The debug handling on addresses is active off The debug handling on addresses is not active Default none lgn Specify whether the PNNI...

Страница 343: ...The shortest path tree debug messages do not go to the console Default none ra Specify whether the route agent debug messages go to the console on The route agent debug messages go to the console off The route agent debug messages do not go to the console Default none linkselection Specify whether the link selection debug messages go to the console on The link selection debug messages go to the co...

Страница 344: ...ff off address itdb ra cp link selection off off off off off SanJose 7 PXM a dbgpnni itf on address on SanJose 7 PXM a dsppnni dbg pnni debugging option hello election nbr itf timer lgn spt node reachability off off off on off off off off address itdb ra cp link selection on off off off off In the second example the parameters are changed as follows Interface debugging is disabled Address handling...

Страница 345: ...nfpnni node delpnni node Attributes Example Delete the node with the node index of 3 Execute dsppnni node and specify a node index of 3 The last line of the d display shows the error node does not exist indicating you successfully deleted the node SanJose 7 PXM a delpnni node 3 SanJose 7 PXM a dsppnni node 3 Unknown Error Code Syntax dsppnni node node index nodeIndex node index 32 bit number start...

Страница 346: ...dex is 1 The node address prefix is 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 9409 f1f1 The length of the address prefix is 104 bits If necessary use dsppnni summary addr to confirm the deletion SanJose 7 PXM a delpnni summary addr 1 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 9409 f1f1 104 SanJose 7 PXM a node index In the current release the only supported value for node index 1 The node index indicates the relative level of the logic...

Страница 347: ...mmand applies to multi peer groups only Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnni bn path node index Syntax Description Contents of the dsppnni bn path Output node index The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within the hierarchy on the switch The range is 1 10 and the lowest level is 1 Range 1 10 Default none node index The range is 1 10 source node IDB index ...

Страница 348: ...D of each destination metrics for the path For each class of service CBR rt VBR nrt VBR ABR UBR the configuration for each of the following routing metrics Administrative weight AW Maximum cell rate MaxCR Available cell rate AvCR Cell transfer delay CTD Cell delay variation CDV Cell loss priority first leaky bucket CLP0 Cell loss priority second leaky bucket CLP0 1 Log no State active standby Priv...

Страница 349: ...path 2 node index 2 source node IDB index source node id 1 56 160 47 009181000000003071f80e56 003071f80e56 01 destination node IDB index destination node id 12 56 160 47 009181000000003071f80e52 003071f80e52 01 CBR RTVBR NRTVBR ABR UBR AW 5040 5040 5040 5040 5040 MaxCR 250000 250000 250000 250000 250000 AvCR 248759 248759 248759 248759 248759 CTD 17 17 17 17 17 CDV 4167 52954 52954 104912 104912 C...

Страница 350: ... for each node node index The node index points to the LGN of this peer group It indicates the relative level of the node within the hierarchy on the switch The range is 1 10 and the lowest level is 1 Range 1 10 Default 1 node index The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within a multi peer group on the switch The supported range is 1 10 and the lowest level is 1 Input por...

Страница 351: ...an LGN using complex node representation in the peer group Geneva 7 PXM a dsppnni bypass node index 1 Input portId 376 Output portId 399 Ptse id 12 Flags a3 CBR RTVBR NRTVBR ABR UBR AW 5040 5040 5040 5040 5040 MCR 0 0 0 0 0 AvCR 100000 100000 100000 100000 100000 CTD 0 0 0 0 0 CDV 0 0 0 0 0 CLR0 0 0 0 0 0 CLR0 1 0 0 0 0 0 CRM 10 10 10 10 10 VF 5 5 5 5 5 Geneva 7 PXM a Log nolog State active standb...

Страница 352: ...e Hello packet debug is enabled off the Hello packet debug is disabled election Display the flag that indicates whether the peer group election debug is enabled on the peer group election debug is enabled off the peer group election debug is disabled nbr Display the flag that indicates whether the neighbor debug is enabled on the neighbor debug is enabled off the neighbor debug is disabled itf Dis...

Страница 353: ...abled address Display the flag that indicates whether the addressing debug is enabled on the addressing debug is enabled off the addressing debug is disabled itdb Display the flag that indicates whether the internal data base debug is enabled on the internal data base debug is enabled off the internal data base debug is disabled ra Display the flag that indicates whether the route agent debug is e...

Страница 354: ... Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnni election node index Syntax Description Objects Displayed The following parameters are displayed for each node node index The system generated node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within a multi peer group on the switch The range is 1 10 The lowest node is 1 and the highest is 10 Note that node index is inversely related to the no...

Страница 355: ...Init time sec 15 Priority 0 Override delay sec 30 Re election time sec 15 Pref PGL 0 0 00 000000000000000000000000 000000000000 00 PGL 0 0 00 000000000000000000000000 000000000000 00 Active parent node id 0 0 00 000000000000000000000000 000000000000 00 Override delay The number of seconds that this node waits for itself to be declared the preferred PGL by unanimous agreement among its peers Re ele...

Страница 356: ...dates The system address table local network reachable address table background routing tables and PNNI summary address table receive updates from the IDB as appropriate The dsppnni idb command can display all the contents or a subset of the IDB You can specify the granularity of the display by using the optional parameters If you enter dsppnni idb with no parameters the display shows the internal...

Страница 357: ... 47 00918100000000107be92f46 00107be92f46 01 node name pswmgx2 2 Geneva 7 PXM a node index The node index is the system generated number of the local logical node In a multi peer group hierarchy the range is 1 10 In the current release the only node index is 1 Range 1 10 nodeNumbe r A number that uniquely identifies a node in the network For a list of the remote node numbers that are visible to th...

Страница 358: ...nk comes The child port ID is the local port ID of the child node from which the uplink comes You can see the details of this uplink by executing dsppnni idb In the display for dsppnni idb the child node index is the local node number The uplink node or upnode is the node at the upper end of the uplink It is the neighboring peer of the ancestor of the node from which the uplink originates The exte...

Страница 359: ...ode index 2 Token 0 Child node portId 66560 Child node number 1 Upnode id 32 56 47 009181001100000000000001 003071f80e56 00 Upnode ATM addr 47 009181000000003071f80e56 003071f80e56 02 Upnode PG id 32 47 00 9181 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 CBR RTVBR NRTVBR ABR UBR AW 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 MaxCR 348207 348207 348207 348207 348207 AvCR 347419 347419 347419 347419 347419 CTD 17 17 17 17 17 CDV 4167...

Страница 360: ...o the corresponding keyword in the cnfpnni intf command and explains the argument function portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 5 5 Default none Physical port Id Display the physical PNNI identifier on the interface The portid variable is entered and displayed as a numeric string formatted as shelf slot subslot port sub...

Страница 361: ...stant bit rate CBR connections on this interface While a cbr connection is active this option limits its bit rate to a static value that remains available until the connection is torn down The bit rate is characterized by the peak cell rate PCR value Range 0 4194304 AW ABR Display the AW for available bit rate ABR connections on this interface While an ABR connection is active that connection chan...

Страница 362: ...erface configuration for port 4 1 1 11 The current release does not support the link aggregation parameter displayed as Aggr token so it appears as a 0 SanJose 7 PXM a dsppnni intf 4 1 1 11 Physical port id 4 1 1 11 Logical port id 17045515 Aggr token 0 AW NRTVBR 5040 AW CBR 5040 AW ABR 5040 AW RTVBR 5040 AW UBR 5040 SanJose 7 PXM a Log log State active standby Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 363: ...ni link node index port id Syntax Description Display Contents The dsppnni link command displays the address link and Hello packet information of each link In a multi peer group it also displays the upnode ATM address and node ID For an explanation of upnode see the description of dsppnni inducing uplink Related Commands dsppnni link selection Attributes node index A system generated value that co...

Страница 364: ...16848898 Remote port id 16848898 Local Phy Port Id 1 1 2 2 Type lowestLevelHorizontalLink Hello state twoWayInside Derive agg 0 Intf index 16848898 SVC RCC index 0 Hello pkt RX 2 Hello pkt TX 2 Remote node name p2spvc6 Remote node id 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f1ef 00309409f1ef 01 Upnode id 0 0 00 000000000000000000000000 000000000000 00 Upnode ATM addr 00 000000000000000000000000 000000000000 ...

Страница 365: ...parallel links Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnni link selection portid Syntax Description Display Contents The display shows the following information for each node Related Commands dsppnni link Attributes portid The PNNI physical port identifier portid is entered and displayed as a 32 bit string formatted as shelf slot subslot port subport For more details see PNNI Format phys...

Страница 366: ... link selection Example Displays the link selection for a parallel link on port 4 1 1 11 This link uses the default of minaw Note that the display also shows the logical port number for the physical port ID SanJose 7 PXM a dsppnni link selection 4 1 1 11 physical port id 4 1 1 11 link selection minaw logical port id 17045515 SanJose 7 PXM a ...

Страница 367: ...ni mtu to specify the PNNI packet size configuration Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnni mtu Display Contents The following parameters are displayed for each node The right column shows the label for each value that appears in the dsppnni mtu command The left column maps each value to the corresponding keyword in the cnfpnni mtu command and explains the argument function Related ...

Страница 368: ...x The system generated node index specifies the relative level of the PNNI logical node within the hierarchy on the switch the node identifier In the current release the only node index is 1 Range 1 10 rmt node id The node index for a remote node is the index assigned to a neighboring node node index The system generated node index in the range 1 10 In the current release the only node index is 1 ...

Страница 369: ...ber of transmitted signal packets in the transmit direction RX PTSP pkts The number of PNNI topology state packets in the receive direction TX PTSP pkts The number of PNNI topology state packets in the transmit direction RX PTSE req pkts The number of PNNI topology state element PTSE request packets in the receive direction TX PTSE req pkts The number of transmitted PTSE request packets in the tra...

Страница 370: ...0000000107b65f27c 00107b65f27c 01 Neighbor state FULL Port count 4 SVC RCC index 0 RX DS pkts 3 TX DS pkts 3 RX PTSP pkts 6032 TX PTSP pkts 2061 RX PTSE req pkts 2 TX PTSE req pkts 1 RX PTSE ack pkts 345 TX PTSE ack pkts 2282 node index 2 node name SanJose Remote node id 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f1f1 00309409f1f1 01 Neighbor state FULL Port count 2 SVC RCC index 0 RX DS pkts 4 TX DS pkts 3 RX...

Страница 371: ...logical nodes on the switch However in the current release the display always shows only one logical node with index number 1 Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnni node node index Syntax Description Related Commands addpnni node cnfpnni node Attributes node index The node index identifies a logical node in relation to other nodes in the hierarchy This node index applies locally wit...

Страница 372: ...346 Cisco ICD MAC address MAC address ATM address length PNNI hierarchy level Default PNNI summary address Default ATM address Default PNNI node identifier node index The node index is a numeric node identifier assigned by the software it is not user configurable Range 1 10 In the current release the only node index is 1 so the display always shows 1 node name Display the PNNI node name assigned t...

Страница 373: ... the node supports point to multipoint branching on This node does not support point to multipoint branching off This node supports point to multipoint branches Admin status Display the administrative status of the node You can disable or enable a node by executing the cnfpnni node command with appropriate parameters up The logical PNNI node is enabled down The logical PNNI node is disabled Operat...

Страница 374: ... node or cnfpnni node Before you change the ATM address disable the nod by executing cnfpnni node enable false See description of cnfpnni node Peer group id Display the pgId of length level that is assigned to the PNNI node The peer group is the PNNI local group The peer group consists of all PNNI nodes with matching pg id values The default value of level is 56 7 bytes which specifies the length ...

Страница 375: ...are identified by a unique number and stored in a list The node ID is the 22 octet that uniquely identifies the node within the routing domain See addpnni node or cnfpnni node for components of the node ID The node level also configured through either the addpnni node or the cnfpnni node command Node name results from cnfname In a multi peer group MPG the index number for nodes above the lowest le...

Страница 376: ...nt s group the grandparent and members of the grandparent s group and so on The MPG in the Example section illustrates this progression node The node number node is a reference to the nodes in the network not a node in the hierarchy of an MPG on a switch see the dsppnni node description for details about node index The entity that has this view and compiles this list of node numbers is a local log...

Страница 377: ... the number of nodes visible at each higher level decreases After acquiring a visual grasp of the dsppnni node list display the screen capture that follows Figure 5 9 provides a more readable list to examine The first series of node numbers is node 1 through node 6 and is the list complied by the lowest level node As reflected in Figure 5 8 mpglax1 is the only node in its peer group so the first s...

Страница 378: ...40 48 47 559181000100000000000000 003071f80833 00 mpglax1 03 40 node node id node name level 6 48 56 47 119181000000000000000000 003071f80e56 00 mpglax2 02 48 node node id node name level 1 48 56 47 339181000000000000000000 003071f80833 00 mpglax1 02 48 node node id node name level 2 40 48 47 559181000100000000000000 003071f80833 00 mpglax1 03 40 node node id node name level 3 48 56 47 11918100000...

Страница 379: ...00000000000 003071f80833 00 mpglax1 03 40 node node id node name level 6 48 56 47 119181000000000000000000 003071f80e56 00 mpglax2 02 48 node node id node name level 1 48 56 47 339181000000000000000000 003071f80833 00 mpglax1 02 48 node node id node name level 2 40 48 47 559181000100000000000000 003071f80833 00 mpglax1 03 40 node node id node name level 3 48 56 47 119181000000000000000000 003071f8...

Страница 380: ...each node is 56 Geneva 7 PXM a dsppnni node list node node id node name level 1 56 160 47 009181000000001029300121 001029300121 01 pswpop6 56 node node id node name level 2 56 160 47 00918100000000c043002de1 00c043002de1 01 pswpop7 56 node node id node name level 3 56 160 47 009181000000000000000000 001029300121 00 pswpop6 02 56 node node id node name level 4 56 160 47 00918100000000500ffde80b 005...

Страница 381: ...s execute dsppnni node list The dsppnni node list command displays network level node indexes under the heading node Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnni path aw cbr rtvbr nrtvbr ubr abr ctd cbr rtvbr nrtvbr cdv cbr rtbvr node index Syntax Description Note The mandatory keywords in this command do not take the usual dash that many keywords require If you include a dash in front of...

Страница 382: ...s to all switches appear in the display Range 1 256 Default 1 S or D The S or D in the first column of the display shows whether the line pertains to the source S or begins one or more lines about the destination D node The node number node index within the network This node number is a unique identifier of the node within the network and appears as node index in many displays Range 1 256 PortId T...

Страница 383: ... as the service class the display is very large and so is truncated Note that this display shows multiple paths to the source SanJose 7 PXM a dsppnni path aw ubr node PortId node id node name D 2 0 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f2aa 00309409f2aa 01 Toroton S 1 17504257 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f1f1 00309409f1f1 01 SanJose node PortId node id node name D 3 0 56 160 47 00918100000000301a431c19 ...

Страница 384: ...1 Paris 4 17438721 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f23c 00309409f23c 01 London 3 17111041 56 160 47 00918100000000301a431c19 00301a431c19 01 Boston 2 17176577 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f2aa 00309409f2aa 01 Toroton S 1 17504257 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f1f1 00309409f1f1 01 SanJose node PortId node id node name D 6 0 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f2a3 00309409f2a3 01 Paris 4 17438721 56 160 4...

Страница 385: ...00000000001a531c01 00001a531c01 01 LA 11 16848918 56 160 47 00918100000000001a531c83 00001a531c83 01 Jup 1 3 16848917 56 160 47 00918100000000301a431c19 00301a431c19 01 Boston 2 17438721 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f2aa 00309409f2aa 01 Toroton S 1 17504257 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f1f1 00309409f1f1 01 SanJose node PortId node id node name D 8 0 56 160 47 00918100000000309409f213 00309409f21...

Страница 386: ...Description tx rx Select a direction for the trace to display tx transmit rx receive node index In the current release the only supported value for node index 1 The node index indicates the relative level of the logical node within a multi peer group on the switch The range is 1 10 and the lowest level is 1 Range 1 10 Default 1 portId The port ID in this instance has the format of the logical ID n...

Страница 387: ...er use the dsppnport command to see the logical port number derived from the physical port number Next check the packet trace you have configure by executing dsppnni pkttrace Geneva 7 PXM a cnfpnni pkttrace tx 17373186 PNNI tx_packet on port 17373186 at level 56 01 00010064 01010100 000038a0 47009181 00000000 309409f3 b8003094 02 09f3b801 47009181 00000000 309409f3 b8003094 09f3b801 38470091 03 81...

Страница 388: ... of PTSEs are 1 Nodal information group 2 Internal reachable addresses 3 External reachable addresses 4 Horizontal links 5 Uplinks multiple peer groups only Granularity of the Output The optional parameters let you determine the granularity of the target of the command The granularity ranges from the whole peer group to a specific logical port Additionally you can specify a detailed display or jus...

Страница 389: ...ID See addpnni node or cnfpnni node for a description Default no specific node ID ptse id An integer that identifies a PTSE generated by a particular node Regardless of the number of times a node sends a PTSE this ID remains the same until a change to the topology occurs For example adding a ATM address to a node causes that node to generate a new PTSE and associated ID The PTSE ID has a theoretic...

Страница 390: ...etime The length of the remaining lifetime in seconds 32 bit number details for IG The flag that determines the level of details for information group IG if the detail option is enabled true Nodal Information Group Parameters Note The current release does not support the logical group node LGN preferred peer group leader PGL and other items that pertain to the levels of a multi peer group type The...

Страница 391: ...elease does not support parent peer groups Default Figure 5 1 shows the factory set default parent peer group PGL The parent peer group PGL identifier is a 22 byte hexadecimal string The current release does not support PGL Nodal State IG Parameters type The ASCII string that indicates the type of the IG nodal state parameters length A 16 bit number flags A string of 8 bit flags input port id The ...

Страница 392: ... current release does not support exterior reachable addresses type The ASCII string that indicates the type of the exterior reachable ATM address IG parameters length A 16 bit number flags A string of 8 bit flags port id The logical port number of the PNNI port This format is a 32 bit number Range 1 2147483648 scope An 8 bit number address info length An 8 bit number The current release does not ...

Страница 393: ...on Range 1 32 Uplink IG Parameters Note The current release does not support uplinks type The ASCII string that indicates the type of up link IG parameters length A 16 bit number flags A string of 8 bit flags remote higher level node id The PNNI node identifier assigned to a PNNI node common pg id The peer group ID of length level that assigned to the PNNI common PG This peer group is the local pe...

Страница 394: ...by CTD metric cells in cells per second Range 1 2147483648 cdv The bandwidth used by CDV metric cells in cells per second Range 1 2147483648 mcr The bandwidth used by MCR metric cells in cells per second Range 1 2147483648 acr The bandwidth used by ACR metric cells in cells per second Range 1 2147483648 clr0 The bandwidth used by CLR0 metric cells in cells per second Range 1 2147483648 clr0 1 The ...

Страница 395: ...00 9181 0000 0000 0000 0000 00 next level LGN PGL id 30 48 56 47 009181000000000000000000 0000c0326496 00 node index 1 originating node name Liz originating node id 56 160 47 0091810000000000c0326496 0000c0326496 00 crm The cell rate margin CRM is a measure of the difference between the effective bandwidth allocation and the allocation for sustainable cell rate It is a safety margin allocated abov...

Страница 396: ...le Note The presence of the colons in the node ID are required but the periods are optional M8850_NY 7 PXM a dsppnni ptse 2 node index 2 originating node name M8850_NY 02 originating node id 48 56 47 009181000002000000000000 00036b5e30cd 00 Type 64 Length 96 Sequence number 155 Checksum 689b PTSE id 1 Remaining lifetime 3224 PTSE type Nodal Info 97 node index 2 originating node name M8850_NY 02 or...

Страница 397: ... PXM a dsppnni ptse 2 48 56 4700918100000200000000000000036b5e30cd00 19 detail true node index 2 originating node name M8850_NY 02 originating node id 48 56 47 009181000002000000000000 00036b5e30cd 00 Type 64 Length 52 Sequence number 152 Checksum bba PTSE id 19 Remaining lifetime 2389 PTSE type Int Reach Addr 224 Type 224 Length 32 Reserved 0 Flags 8000 Port id 1 Scope 0 Ail 14 Aic 1 prefix 47 00...

Страница 398: ... directly attached to the local node If you enter network the display shows the advertising node ID the addresses advertised by other nodes and the routing parameters for each reachable node Note The display may not update frequently enough if you are configuring the network You can change timers to update more frequently but changing timers can have unexpected effects Before you modify a timer di...

Страница 399: ...of the switch results from the cnfname command and appears in the CLI prompt Advertising node number The number of the remote node that has advertised information to the current node This number has a range of 1 256 and appears only if you specified the network argument The local node generates the node numbers in the sequence that it discovers its neighbors You can only provide it as a command pa...

Страница 400: ...ior false ATM addr prefix 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 ff0f ef38 0000 010d 1820 152 scope 0 port id 4294967295 Exterior false ATM addr prefix 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 ff0f ef38 0000 010d 1821 152 scope 0 port id 4294967295 Exterior false ATM addr prefix 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 ff0f ef38 0000 010d 1822 152 Display all the addresses and address prefixes that are reachable from this node and display the routi...

Страница 401: ...0107b65f27c 01 Node name Paris scope 0 Advertising node number 8 Exterior true ATM addr prefix 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 9409 f13f 104 Advertising nodeid 56 160 47 00918100000000107b65f27c 00107b65f27c 01 Node name Paris forward direction CBR RTVBR NRTVBR ABR UBR AW 5040 5040 5040 5040 5040 MaxCR 351500 351500 351500 351500 351500 AvCR 290935 290935 290935 290935 290935 CTD 41 41 41 n a n a CDV 10 10...

Страница 402: ...layed parameters determine The tolerance of cost calculations The frequency of routing table generation The type of load balancing that is specified The type of on demand routing that is specified The type of administration weight table that is enabled Caution You can change the routing policies to optimize PNNI routing for your network but incorrect routing policies can cripple or even crash a ne...

Страница 403: ...ndors Cisco Systems currently maps the following percentages for the Cisco MGX 8850 switch 0 the total AWs along both directions of the path must be identical 1 2 the total AWs along both directions of the path must be within 1 06 3 4 the total AWs along both directions of the path must be within 3 125 5 9 the total AWs along both directions of the path must be within 6 25 10 15 the total AWs alon...

Страница 404: ... Table The flag that enables or disables administrative weight AW for the background routing table The AW is the cost to traffic that traverses that path The metric AW can be specified on the interface and by the service class or QoS class and it is associated with each link AW is a defining factor when routes are selected The AW parameters influence how PNNI selects paths in the peer group and th...

Страница 405: ...s Example Display the parameters associated with the current routing policy for this node Geneva 7 PXM a dsppnni routing policy SPT epsilon 0 Load balance random SPT holddown time 1 On demand routing best fit SPT path holddown time 2 AW Background Table on CTD Background Table on CDV Background Table on Geneva 7 PXM a Log nolog State active standby Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 406: ... command displays the table that maps UNI 4 0 scope to PNNI hierarchy level Note The scope map table requires UNI 4 0 support so this command is not useful in the current release Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnni scope map Objects Displayed Displays the entire scope map table Related Commands cnfpnni scope map Attributes Example This command is not supported by the current rele...

Страница 407: ...included in the bypass table the spoke values can be used to select which peer group a route transits The PG with the lowest spoke AW is the lowest cost PG and therefore the best path to use based on AW Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnni spoke node id Syntax Description Display Contents The following parameters are displayed for each node node id The node identifier of a PNNI lo...

Страница 408: ... 0 CRM 10 10 10 10 10 VF 5 5 5 5 5 AW CBR The administrative weight for CBR connections on this interface While a CBR connection is active this option limits its bit rate to a static value that remains available until the connection is torn down The bit rate is characterized by the peak cell rate PCR value Range 0 4194304 AW ABR The administrative weight for available bit rate ABR connections on t...

Страница 409: ...ion Display Contents node index Specify the system generated identifier of a logical node within a hierarchy In the current release the only node index is 1 Range 1 10 Default 1 node index The number of the node within the hierarchy on this switch The range for a multi peer group is 1 10 For a single peer group the only node index is 1 Type Display the value of the argument type whether the kind o...

Страница 410: ...uppress false State advertising Summary address 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 ff0f ef38 104 node index 1 Type internal Suppress false State inactive Summary address 47 0091 8100 0000 0010 7b65 f260 104 Geneva 7 PXM a State This system generated ASCII string indicates the advertisement state Possible states advertising notadvertised or inactive Summary address The ATM PNNI summary address assigned to the ...

Страница 411: ...thing the display shows all SVC based RCCs attached to all PNNI nodes in the network Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnni svcc rcc node index svc index Syntax Description Display Contents The dsppnni svcc rcc command displays node Hello packet and SVC information for each RCC Related Commands None Attributes node index This system generated indicates the relative position of a log...

Страница 412: ...0 00 node index 2 svc index 33 Hello pkt RX 34 SVCC VPI 34 Hello pkt TX 34 SVCC VCI 128 Hello state 2wayOutside Remote node id 56 160 39 840f80113744000000400202 00107b0efe01 00 Remote node ATM addr 39 840f 8011 3744 0000 0040 0102 4000 0c80 8030 00 Geneva 7 PXM a mpgses1 2 PXM a dsppnni svcc rcc node index 2 svc index 1 Hello pkt RX 68 SVCC VPI 1 Hello pkt TX 67 SVCC VCI 35 Hello state twoWayInsi...

Страница 413: ...PXM45 Syntax dsppnni svcc rcc timer node index Syntax Description Display Contents The following parameters are displayed for each node node index Specify the node identifier in the range 1 10 In the current release the value of the node index variable must be 1 Range 1 10 Default 1 node index The local node identifier within the hierarchy The range is 1 10 In the current release the value of node...

Страница 414: ...calledIntegrityTime variable specifies the interval in sec that this node will wait for an SVCC to become fully established before giving up and tearing down the connection Range 5 300 Called party integrity time Display the value of calledIntegrityTime which limits wait times for establishing an SVCC as a called party After the node has decided to accept an SVCC as the called party the calledInte...

Страница 415: ... node index The node index indicates the relative position of the logical node within a multi peer group on the switch The range is 1 10 and the lowest level is 1 If you do not have the node index use dsppnni node to see a list of all logical nodes and node indexes on the current switch In the current release the value of node index must be 1 Range 1 10 Default 1 node index The relative position o...

Страница 416: ...n re transmissions of unacknowledged DS PTSE request and PTSP AvCR proportional PM The proportional multiplier is a percent that used in the algorithms that determine significant change for AvCR parameters CDV PM multiplier The proportional multiplier is a percent that is used in the algorithms that determine significant change for peak to peak cell delay variation CDV AvCR minimum threshold The m...

Страница 417: ...plays the PNNI timer values for only node 1 SanJose 7 PXM a dsppnni timer 1 node index 1 Hello holddown 100ms 120 PTSE holddown 100ms 120 Hello int sec 15 PTSE refresh int sec 1800 Hello inactivity factor 5 PTSE lifetime factor 200 Retransmit int sec 5 AvCR proportional PM 3 CDV PM multiplier 25 AvCR minimum threshold 50 CTD PM multiplier 50 Peer delayed ack int 100ms 10 Logical horizontal link in...

Страница 418: ...5 124 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 5 PNNI Commands dsppnni timer ...

Страница 419: ...tistics The commands pertain to the following areas of PNNI port function Address assignment Address filtering Address ping Signalling Control Channels Defaults for bandwidth parameters Connection related commands either or both SVCs and SPVCs Port resource commands IISP interfaces ILMI Port Management SSCOP service specific connection oriented protocol Congestion thresholds for the node and for i...

Страница 420: ...vci num num conns to del verbose 1 0 Command Entry When you enter a command with the current version of the product you must type all intended arguments before you press the Return key or Enter key If you press the Return key or Enter key with incorrect parameters or no parameters if the command requires parameters a message displays the syntax and parameter ranges The returned message may also su...

Страница 421: ...identify the same entity For example the format of a logical port that you enter on an AXSM is different from the format you would enter on the PXM45 This section describes these formats in the PNNI and AXSM contexts and how they correspond to each other The parallel actions of configuring or displaying logical elements on different cards is broadly illustrated in the Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch...

Страница 422: ...NIs you can configure multiple ports on a line The maximum number of logical ports on an AXSM is 60 regardless of the AXSM model or the number of lines on the back cards The range of logical port numbers is 1 60 for an AXSM regardless of whether the interface type is UNI NNI or VNNI PNNI Format The PNNI controller requires the following format to identify a physical port shelf slot subslot port su...

Страница 423: ...o PNNI is a line on the AXSM and a subport to PNNI is a logical interface or logical port on an AXSM An example of a PNNI physical port identifier is 1 2 1 1 This portid corresponds to an AXSM with the following particulars Slot 1 Bay 2 Line 1 Logical interface 1 or logical port 1 Dot Notation in ATM Addresses In this chapter many examples of ATM addresses appear with dots The dots serve only to a...

Страница 424: ...s on a UNI port disable ILMI address registration on the port To disable ILMI address registration use cnfaddrreg and supply the portID followed by no Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax addaddr portid atm address length type int ext proto local static plan e164 nsap scope value redst yes no Syntax Description portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot p...

Страница 425: ...ar side boundary node to be able to reach the near side boundary node Note that for any ATM address on an IISP port or a public UNI you must specify external Possible entries internal or just int or external or just ext Default int proto The protocol for advertising a reachable address If the type is internal enter local for the proto parameter If the type is extenal enter static for the proto par...

Страница 426: ...parameters in the default state Use dspaddr to confirm the address Note that the ICD code differs from the default from Cisco Systems The address is 47 0077 6400 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 4000 0c81 8000 00 Geneva 7 PXM a addaddr 11 2 8 28 47 0077 6400 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 4000 0c81 8000 00 160 Geneva 7 PXM a dspaddr 11 2 8 28 47 0077 6400 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 4000 0c81 8000 00 length 160 type internal pro...

Страница 427: ...tax Description name The name of the filter set can have up to 30 characters address The ATM address The plan determines the possible number of bytes or bits in the address An NSAP address can have 1 20 eight bit bytes where a byte is two hexadecimal numbers A 20 byte address is an exact address and less than 20 bytes is a prefix An E 164 address can have 8 15 decimal digits A 15 digit address is ...

Страница 428: ...calling or called You can specify this field only if you also specify the address field Default calling index Order in which the filter is applied If you assign more than one filter to a port you must plan the order in which the node applies the filters to a calling party Plan the filters and their order of application so that the order of application does not negate the purpose of filtering The f...

Страница 429: ...tributes Examples On the port with prefix 47 1111 1111 create address filter mendocino The 47 indicates NSAP ICD address plan Note that the three dot notation is necessary for the prefix and the address length of 40 is the 40 bits that make up that hex prefix Unknown 1 1 PXM a addfltset mendocino address 47 1111 1111 length 40 index 2 Log log State active Privilege GROUP1 ...

Страница 430: ...ts administrative and operational states are down by default Use uppnport to bring up the port The addpnport command only creates the port The PNNI commands for configuring the operational characteristics of the port are cnfpnportrange cnfpnportcac and cnfpnportsig If the configuration you specify with these commands conflict with the values you specify on the service module through the addport or...

Страница 431: ... these commands had not been executed IF and Admin would be provisioning and down respectively For details on the content of the dsppnports command see its description M8850_NY 7 PXM a addpnport 6 1 1 1 M8850_NY 7 PXM a dsppnports Summary of total connections p2p point to point p2mp point to multipoint SpvcD DAX spvc SpvcR Routed spvc Type Svcc Svpc SpvcD SpvpD SpvcR SpvpR Total p2p 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Страница 432: ...br cbr vbr_rt vbr_nrt pcr peak cell rate scr sustain cell rate trace yes no timeout time out in secs data yes no interval time Syntax Description destination address Destination address in NSAP format Example the dots are optional 47 00918100000000500ffde873 00500ffde873 01 Default none setupcall Sets up an SVC call as part of the ping If you do not include the setupcall parameter the system perfo...

Страница 433: ... 263168 DTL 1 NODE 2 56 160 71 0 145 15 253 232 115 Port 2 0 Port List no of ports 1 Port ID 1 263168 svcpop1 1 PXM a trace Enable path trace during ping This parameter only applies if setupcall is enabled Possible values yes or no Default no timeout Connection timeout for the ping This parameter applies only if setupcall is enabled Range 5 120 seconds Default 5 seconds data If you enable data the...

Страница 434: ... 11 Geneva 7 PXM a dsppnconstats 4 1 1 11 Call Statistics for 4 1 1 11 Incoming Call Attempts 209 Outgoing Call Attempts 8 Incoming Call Success 6 Outgoing Call Success 0 Incoming Call Failures 0 Outgoing Call Failures 209 Incoming Filtering Failures 0 Outgoing Filtering Failures 0 Incoming Routing Failures 0 Outgoing Routing Failures 209 Incoming CAC Failures 0 Outgoing CAC Failures 0 Incoming Ti...

Страница 435: ...neva 7 PXM a dsppnconstats 4 1 1 11 Call Statistics for 4 1 1 11 Incoming Call Attempts 0 Outgoing Call Attempts 8 Incoming Call Success 0 Outgoing Call Success 0 Incoming Call Failures 0 Outgoing Call Failures 0 Incoming Filtering Failures 0 Outgoing Filtering Failures 0 Incoming Routing Failures 0 Outgoing Routing Failures 0 Incoming CAC Failures 0 Outgoing CAC Failures 0 Incoming Timer Failures...

Страница 436: ...stats Clear Signaling Statistics Clears existing signaling statistics for one port or all ports Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clrsigstats portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfsigdiag delsigdiag dspsigdiag dspsigstats Attributes portid The port in the format shelf slot subslot port subport See PNNI Format page 6 4 Log log State active Privilege SUPER_GP ...

Страница 437: ...lrsigstats 3 1 1 1 Clearing Signaling Statistics for 3 1 1 1 8850_NY 7 PXM a dspsigstats 3 1 1 1 Signaling Statistics for 3 1 1 1 Message Rcv Xmt Call Proceeding 0 0 Connect 0 0 Connect Ack 0 0 Setup 0 0 Release 0 0 Release Complete 0 0 Add Party 0 0 Add Party Ack 0 0 Add Party Rej 0 0 Drop Party 0 0 Restart 0 0 Restart Ack 0 0 Status 0 0 Status Enquiry 0 0 Alerting 0 0 Notify 0 0 Progress 0 0 Las...

Страница 438: ... specify the statistics for an individual port or all ports on the switch Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clrsscopstats portid Syntax Description Related Commands dspsscopstats Attributes Example Clear the SSCOP statistics on port 4 1 1 11 Geneva 7 PXM a clrsscopstats 4 1 1 11 portid If you do not specify a port this command clears all SSCOP statistics on the switch The portid is the...

Страница 439: ...ight justified encoding format For PNNI to search the address correctly all nodes in the PNNI network must use the same justification Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfe164justify left right Syntax Description Related Commands dspsvcparm Attributes Examples Configure right hand justification for the E 164 AESAs Geneva 7 PXM a cnfe164justify right left or right Justification of E164 ...

Страница 440: ...sting calls The items that enhanced IISP include are Generic identifier transport GIT Virtual path service over the IISP Added support or nrt VBR and rt VBR Transport of frame discard specification Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfenhiisp portid yes no Syntax Description Related Commands dspenhiisp Attributes Examples Enable enhanced IISP on port 11 2 1 1 Geneva 7 PXM a cnfenhiisp ...

Страница 441: ...card for AAL5 cells Use the dspsigparm command to see the enable status of frame discard for AAL5 cells Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnffdonaal5 yes no Syntax Description Related Commands dspsigparm Attributes Examples Disable frame discard for AAL5 cells on the switch Geneva 7 PXM a cnffdonaal5 no yes Install frame discard on the presence of the AAL5 IE The default is yes no Do n...

Страница 442: ...escription name A name for the filter set the maximum is 30 characters address The 1 40 digit NSAP or 1 15 digit E 164 address You can add the address to a filter set The default is modifying the accessMode field of a filter element using the index only in this case the you need not specify the address field length If the address is specified the length must be specified For NSAP the length is in ...

Страница 443: ...h Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 6 Logical Node Port and Signaling Commands cnffltset Related Commands addfltset delfltset dspfltset Attributes Log log State active Privilege SUPER_GP ...

Страница 444: ...tatenqloval Syntax Description Related Commands dspintfcongth dspnodalcongth Attributes portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 setuphi The number of connection set up messages per second Above this number the condition of set up messages on the interface is congested Range 1 260 calls per second Default 180 unackedSta...

Страница 445: ... Example Configure a congestion threshold of 200 for set up messages on 6 1 1 1 Check the results by using the dspintfcongth command M8850_NY 7 PXM a cnfintfcongth 6 1 1 1 setuphi 200 M8850_NY 7 PXM a dspintfcongth 6 1 1 1 Congestion Thresholds for port 6 1 1 1 Parameter Value unit setuphi 100 cps unackedStatEnqLo 40 messages unackedStatEnqHi 200 messages M8850_NY 7 PXM a ...

Страница 446: ...gHi incompjour incompleteJournalCallsHi vsiqmild mildCongPerc vsiqmedium mediumCongPerc vsiqsevere severeCongPerc Syntax Description setuphi The number of connection setup messages per second above which the node is congested Range 1 1000 connection setup messages per second Default 500 on a PXM45 B with R7K processor 180 in all other cases statenqlo The number of status enquiries per second below...

Страница 447: ...s vsiqmild The VSI Q depth above which VSI master is mildly congested The mildCongPerc value is a percentage of VSI master slave communication window size This threshold applies to all the PNNI logical ports on the node Range 1 175 Default 5 vsiqmedium The VSI Q depth above which VSI master is congested at a medium level The mediumCongPercis value is a percent of VSI master slave communication win...

Страница 448: ...stion thresholds as follows svcpop1 1 PXM a cnfnodalcongth setuphi 80 vsiqmild 100 vsiqmedium 140 vsiqsevere 175 svcpop1 1 PXM a dspnodalcongth Parameter Value Unit setuphi prov 80 cps setuphi curr 80 cps statenqlo 100 cps statenqhi 200 cps connpendinglo 400 messages connpendinghi 500 messages incompjournalhi 5 cycles vsiqdepthmild 100 multiplier vsiqdepthmedium 140 multiplier vsiqdepthsevere 175 ...

Страница 449: ... type VCs including ILMI when enabled adds to the bandwidth load on the port Use dspload to determine the load on port resources The VC for ILMI is also a control channel but its bandwidth parameters are fixed as follows PCR 1000 cps SCR 50cps and MBS 1024 cells The controller guarantees bandwidth for control VCs The reserved bandwidth is proportional to the line rate T3 E3 OC3 OC12 and so on Also...

Страница 450: ...ers other than MBS and the operational section shows actual bandwidth parameters including the MBS you configured Remember to re activate the port by using uppnport 8850_NY 8 PXM a cnfpnctlvc 3 1 1 1 sscop mbs 100 ERROR Port is not out of service 8850_NY 8 PXM a dnpnport 3 1 1 1 8850_NY 8 PXM a cnfpnctlvc 3 1 1 1 sscop mbs 100 cnfpnctlvc Successful 8850_NY 7 PXM a dsppnctlvc 3 1 1 1 vc type sscop ...

Страница 451: ...ecify at least one filter set if you use this command Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfpnportacc portid in in filter name out out filter name Syntax Description Related Commands delpnportacc addfltset Attributes portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 in in filter name the name of the filter set that ap...

Страница 452: ...ller When the default for maxbw and minbw is used for all service types the common AvCR is advertised for all the service types You must specify at least one of the optional keywords Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfpnportcac portid service_category bookfactor utilization factor maxbw max bw percent minbw min bw percent maxvc max vc percent minvc min vc percent maxvcbw max vc bw Sy...

Страница 453: ...onfigured on the service module for 100 Mbits 3 Booking factors greater than 100 result in link undersubscription and the bandwidth booked for a connection exceeds the connection s configured bandwidth This situation is referred to as underbooking For the same 100 Mbit link the booking factor is 200 PNNI advertises 50 Mbits calculated as 100 100 200 50 The link is configured on the service module ...

Страница 454: ...ards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfpnportcc portid maxp2mproot max p2mp root maxp2mpleaf max p2mp leaf svcblock yes no spvcblock yes no Syntax Description portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 maxp2mproot The max p2mp root maximum number of root VCs on this port Default 1000 maxp2mpleaf The max p2mp leaf...

Страница 455: ...ing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 6 Logical Node Port and Signaling Commands cnfpnportcc Related Commands dsppnportcc Attributes Log log State active Privilege GROUP1 ...

Страница 456: ...ssumption and therefore the default for cnfpnportloscallrel is to retain all the calls for a temporary loss of connectivity but this can also have the effect of delaying the rerouting of connections The cnfpnportloscallrel command lets you direct the system to reroute calls without delay on a particular port Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfpnportloscallrel portid yes no Syntax Des...

Страница 457: ...r negotiation during ILMI auto configuration Note that the maxsvccvpi parameter is limited by the highest VPI that the switch assigns whether the port is a UNI or an NNI In addition to the port ID you must specify at least one keyword for cnfpnportrange Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfpnportrange portid minsvccvpi min svcc vpi maxsvccvpi max svcc vpi minsvccvci min svcc vci maxsvc...

Страница 458: ...ober 2001 Chapter 6 Logical Node Port and Signaling Commands cnfpnportrange Related Commands dsppnportrange Attributes minsvpcvpi The min svpc vp minimum VPI for SVPC Range 1 4095 Default 1 maxsvpcvpi The max svpc vp maximum VPI for SVPC Range 1 4095 Default 4095 Log log State active Privilege GROUP1 ...

Страница 459: ...i30 uni31 none nniver iisp30 iisp31 pnni10 enni unitype public private addrplan both aesa e164 side user network vpi vpi sigvci signalling vci rccvci routing vci cntlvc ip Syntax Description portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 univer The UNI version uni30 uni31 none Note that univer and nniver are mutually exclusiv...

Страница 460: ...4 and aesa The default is both Only a public UNI can use this parameter For all other interface types the port automatically accepts either AESA or E 164 address plans side The side of the port type user or network This parameter applies to IISP only and public UNI An NNI interface type automatically is network An IISP or public UNI has a user side and a network side If both sides are the same a c...

Страница 461: ...ng Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 6 Logical Node Port and Signaling Commands cnfpnportsig Related Commands dsppnportsig Attributes Log log State active Privilege GROUP1 ...

Страница 462: ...NY 7 PXM a dsppnport 1 2 1 1 Port 1 2 1 1 Logical ID 16848897 IF status up Admin Status up UCSM enable Auto config enable Addrs reg enable IF side network IF type nni UniType private Version pnni10 Input filter 0 Output filter 0 minSvccVpi 0 maxSvccVpi 200 minSvccVci 35 maxSvccVci 255 minSvpcVpi 1 maxSvpcVpi 200 SpvcCfg SpvcActive SpvpCfg SpvpActive p2p 0 0 0 0 p2mp 0 0 0 0 Svcc Svpc Total p2p 0 0...

Страница 463: ...this command lets specify the maximum number of crankbacks that PNNI can attempt at a port You must specify at least one of the optional parameters Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfsig portid t301 t301 timer t303 t303 timer t308 t308 timer t310 t310 timer t316 t316 timer t317 t317 timer t322 t322 timer t397 t397 timer t398 t398 timer t399 t399 timer maxcrbk value Syntax Description...

Страница 464: ... 10 seconds for PNNI Default 10 t316 The t316 timer Set the T316 timer Range 90 300 seconds Default 90 t317 The t317 timer Set the T317 timer Range 60 300 seconds Default 60 t322 The t322 timer Set the T322 timer 4 20 seconds Default 4 t397 The t397 timer Set the T397 timer Range 180 240 seconds Default 180 t398 The t398 timer Set the T398 timer Range 4 20 seconds Default 4 t399 The t399 timer Set...

Страница 465: ...le Configure port 1 1 1 1 to have the maximum crankback count of 5 Check the results with the dspsig command Note the default values in the dspsig output pop20one 7 PXM a cnfsig 1 1 1 1 maxcrbk 5 pop20one 7 PXM a dspsig 1 1 1 1 Signaling Timers for port 1 1 1 1 Timer Value secs t301 180 t303 4 t308 30 t310 10 t316 90 t317 60 t322 4 t397 180 t398 4 t399 14 Max Crankback 5 ...

Страница 466: ...mask atm address mask clgaddrmask atm address mask casttype all p2p p2mp clrcause clear cause code connctgy all svc svp swvc swvp inport portid outport portid maxrec max num records scope all ext int servctgy all cbr rtvbr nrtvbr ubr abr status active inactive Syntax Description enable disable or index Enable or disable signaling diagnostics or configure an index Specify the diagnostics index numb...

Страница 467: ... p2p point to multipoint p2mp currently not supported or both all Default all clrcause The clear cause code Filters ATM signaling call failures by the release cause code a decimal number as specified in the ATM Forum UNI 3 1 specification Default 0 meaning the cause code is not considered during filtering connctgy Filters ATM signaling call failures by virtual circuit category SPVC SPVP SVC SVP or...

Страница 468: ...gnaling call failures by service category service type valid entries are all for all service types cbr rtvbr nrtvbr ubr or abr Default all status The status of the entry for the signaling diagnostics filter table Type active to begin filtering failed connections or inactive to stop filtering failed connections The inactive specification causes the node to delete all the records associated with the...

Страница 469: ...fault SPVC prefix that is the same as the Cisco supplied ATM address prefix Each of these default prefixes contains an International Code Designator ICD that is unique to Cisco Systems Therefore Cisco Systems recommends that you change the ICD identifier for both the ATM address prefix and the SPVC prefix if the node is planned for operation in a public ATM network If the node operates in a privat...

Страница 470: ... Port and Signaling Commands cnfspvcprfx Example First display the current SPVC prefix The ICD field shows the prefix is the default from Cisco 0091 Configure the SPVC prefix 47 0077780000000aa2109ff214 pop20one 7 PXM a dspspvcprfx SPVC Node Prefix 47 00918100000000107b65f33c pop20one 7 PXM a cnfspvcprfx 47 0077780000000aa2109ff214 ...

Страница 471: ...309 timer 0 maxcc retries 0 sndwnd send window packets 0 rcvwnd recv window packets 0 Syntax Description portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 polltmr Number of seconds to send POLL PDUs in the active phase A 0 forces restore of the default value Range 1 5 seconds Default 1 second keepalivetmr Number of seconds to se...

Страница 472: ...t 30 seconds t309tmr Number of seconds before SAAL reconnects after disconnection Range 1 15 seconds Default 10 seconds maxcc Maximum number of retries for connection control operations A 0 forces restoration of the default Range 1 15 Default 10 sndwnd Number of packets the port can send before it must receive an acknowledgment from the ATM switch A 0 forces restoration of the default Range 1 127 ...

Страница 473: ...gn an IP address to a switch s interface use ipifconfig For information about installing the SNMP agent for CWM see Cisco WAN Manager Installation for Solaris Release 10 Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnftrapip ip address Syntax Description Related Commands dsptrapip dsptrapmgr addtrapmgr deltrapmgr Attributes Example Assign IP address 172 27 27 184 to the switch then use the dsptra...

Страница 474: ...efault plan is NSAP An NSAP address can have 1 20 8 bit bytes where a byte is 2 hexadecimal characters Cisco recommends that you use 20 bytes for the NSAP address An E 164 address can 8 15 decimal digits The number of bits or bytes in the ATM address effects the uniqueness of the address The longest address ensures total uniqueness of the address With a one byte address any caller that sends an ad...

Страница 475: ... Commands deladdr Related Commands addaddr dspaddr Attributes Example On port 11 2 8 22 delete 47 0091 8100 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 4000 0c81 8000 00 Note that the command entry includes the address length of 160 after the address Geneva 7 PXM a deladdr 11 2 8 28 47 0091 8100 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 4000 0c81 8000 00 160 Log log State active Privilege GROUP1 ...

Страница 476: ...t Removes an ATM address filter set Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax delfltset name index Syntax Description Related Commands addfltset cnffltset dspfltset Attributes Example Remove the connect filter set from the port Geneva 7 PXM a delfltset connect name The name of the filter set index Delete a specific filter element Range 1 65535 Default 0 Log log State active Privilege GROUP1 ...

Страница 477: ...If the controller does no provisioning on the port in the Plug and Play Scenario then the PNNI port on the controller is removed if you remove the PNNI Partition on the switch Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax delpnport portid Syntax Description Related Commands addpnport uppnport dnpnport dsppnport Attributes Example Delete port 11 2 8 28 from the switch Geneva 7 PXM a delpnport 11 2 ...

Страница 478: ...s Command Runs PXM45 Syntax delpnportacc portid in out Syntax Description Related Commands cnfpnportacc Attributes Example Delete the filter group for incoming calls from port 11 2 8 28 Geneva 7 PXM a delpnportacc 11 2 8 28 in portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 in Delete incoming access group for the port out Dele...

Страница 479: ...es no outport yes no maxrec yes no scope yes no servctgy yes no Syntax Description index Specifies the diagnostics index number for the filter table If no other keywords are entered the indexed filter table entry is deleted Range 1 50 cldaddr Removes the configured called address from the filter entry clgaddr Removes the configured calling address from the filter entry cldaddrmask yes returns the ...

Страница 480: ...ag delsigdiag dspsigstats clrsigstats Attributes inport yes returns the incoming port to the default Default no outport yes returns the outgoing port to the default Default no maxrec yes returns the maximum records to the default Default no scope yes to disable filtering by scope Default no servctgy yes returns the service category to the default Default no Log log State active Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 481: ...ng SSCOP Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax disablesscop portid yes no Syntax Description Related Commands cnfsscop dspsscop dspsscopstats Attributes Example Disable SSCOP on port 11 2 8 28 Geneva 7 PXM a disablesscop 11 2 8 28 yes Geneva 7 PXM a portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 yes or no The choice f...

Страница 482: ...e appropriate the applicable commands state that you must down a port by using dnpnport Note This command deletes all connections on a port except for SPVCs whose endpoints are on the port Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dnpnport portid Syntax Description Related Commands addpnport delpnport uppnport dsppnport Attributes Examples Remove port 11 2 8 22 from service Geneva 7 PXM a dnpn...

Страница 483: ... internal or external The protocol for advertising the address The choice for address distribution The scope applicable to multi peer groups only Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspaddr portid Syntax Description Related Commands addaddr deladdr Attributes Examples Display the ATM address and other details for port 3 1 1 1 8850_NY 8 PXM a dspaddr 3 1 1 1 47 0091 8100 0002 0003 6b5e 30...

Страница 484: ...isplay the ATM addresses and prefixes on port 2 1 1 1 Geneva 7 PXM a dspatmaddr 2 1 1 1 Port Id 2 1 Configured Port Address es 39 840f 8011 3744 0000 0040 1005 3456 7834 7777 77 length 160 type internal proto local scope 0 plan nsap dcc redistribute false ILMI Configured Port Prefix es 47 0091 8100 0000 0000 0ca7 9e01 88 8888 8888 0000 0000 0000 0000 ILMI Registered Port Address es 47 0091 8100 00...

Страница 485: ...ndpoint for VCCs When the optional vci is not present the segment endpoint is a F4 flow endpoint for VPCs This command applies to established calls only Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspconsegep portid vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands cnfoamsegep dspoamsegep cnfconsegep delconsegep Attributes portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot po...

Страница 486: ...ng for one port or all ports Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspenhiisp portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfenhiisp Attributes Example Geneva 7 PXM a dspenhiisp Enhanced IISP Features Setting Port Id Enabled portid1 yes portid2 no Geneva 7 PXM a portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 Log nolog ...

Страница 487: ...ltset dspfltset Display Filter Set Displays a specific ATM filter set or a summary of ATM filter sets Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspfltset name Syntax Description Related Commands addfltset cnffltset delfltset Attributes name If you do not type a filter set name a summary of ATM filter sets is displayed Log log State any_state Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 488: ...01234567890 AddrLen 160 bits AddrPlan Nsap AccessMode Permit AddrList Calling FilterName SanJose Index 2 Address 1234567890123456789012345678901234567891 AddrLen 160 bits AddrPlan Nsap AccessMode Deny AddrList Called Output example for the command dspfltset Filter Number 1 FilterName SanJose ScreeningDigits 40 CgPtyAbsentAction Permit CdPtyAbsentAction Deny Filter Number 2 FilterName Sunnyvale Scr...

Страница 489: ...dspintfcongcntr portid Syntax Description Related Commands dspintfcongth cnfintfcongth Attributes Examples Geneva 7 PXM a dspintfcongcntr 11 2 2 22 Parameter Value thresh1 thresh2 setupRx 0 140 180 unackstatenq 0 40 100 Parameter Value Mild Medium Severe vsiqdepth 0 5 10 20 Geneva 7 PXM a Note vsiqdepth is the depth of the VSI queue for the slave that serves the interface identified by portid and ...

Страница 490: ...d Commands dspnodalcongflag Attributes Examples Geneva 7 PXM a dspitfcongflags 4 1 1 1 Parameter Value vsimildcongflg FALSE vsimedcongflg FALSE vsiseverecongflg FALSE setupflg FALSE unackstatenqcongflg FALSE Congestion Action Flags for Interface 1 4 Parameter Value dropsetupflg FALSE dropestabflg FALSE queuerel FALSE markcallsforrelflag FALSE pacevsiresyncflg FALSE pacestatenqflg FALSE speedjourna...

Страница 491: ...a port Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspintfcongth portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfintfcongth Attributes Examples svcpop1 1 PXM a dspintfcongth 10 1 Congestion Thresholds for port 10 1 Parameter Value unit setuphi 90 cps unackedStatEnqLo 40 messages unackedStatEnqHi 100 messages Geneva 7 PXM a portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslo...

Страница 492: ...resholds and current contents of the congestion counters for the node Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspnodalcongcntr Related Commands None Attributes Example Display the node level congestion thresholds Geneva 7 PXM a dspnodalcongcntr Parameter Value thresh1 thresh2 setupRx 0 90 100 statenqRx 0 100 200 connpending 0 400 500 incompljournal 0 5 Parameter Value Mild Medium Severe vsiq...

Страница 493: ...fcongflags Attributes Example Display the node level congestion flags Geneva 7 PXM a dspnodalcongflags Parameter Value memflg FALSE ipcflg FALSE sarflg FALSE remstatenqflg FALSE incompjournalingflg FALSE setupflg FALSE connpendingflg FALSE connswitchoverflg FALSE conntrfparmflg FALSE conntrfabrflg FALSE Nodal Congestion Action Flags are Parameter Value dropsetupflg FALSE dropestabflg FALSE queuere...

Страница 494: ...r second below which the status enquiry congestion condition is dropped Range 1 500 calls per second Default 100 calls per second statenqhi The number of connection setup messages per second above which the status enquiries have congested the node Range 1 500 calls per second Default 200 calls per second connpendlo The aggregate number of connections in the establishment phase below which establis...

Страница 495: ...iqmild The VSI Q depth above which the VSI master is mildly congested This threshold is represented as a percentage of the VSI master slave communication window This threshold applies to all the interfaces on the node Range 1 175 Default 5 vsiqmedium The VSI Q limit above which the VSI master is congested at a medium level This threshold is represented as a percentage of VSI master slave communica...

Страница 496: ...ddress Display the default ping ATM address Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppingatmaddr Related Commands dsppingatmaddr aesa_ping Attributes Example Display the ATM ping address Geneva 7 PXM a dsppingatmaddr 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 ff0f ef38 0030 ff0f ef38 99 length 160 type unknown proto unknown scope 0 plan unknown redistribute false Geneva 7 PXM a Log nolog State active Privileg...

Страница 497: ...allTable MIBs This command can be issued at any node in the route Refer to the example for the contents of the command output Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppncon portid vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands dsppncons Attributes portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 vpi VPI for the call Defaul...

Страница 498: ...ess 47 009181000000003071f80e49 000000010500 00 Called subaddress 1 N A Called subaddress 2 N A OE Port 1 7 OE VPI 1 OE VCI 39 OE CallRef 39 OE CallRefFlag 0 OAM Type Not an OAM Endpoint Connection type SPVC Cast type point to point Bearer class BCOBX Service category CBR Call clipping susceptibility no Tx conformance CBR 1 Rx conformance CBR 1 Tx pcr 50 Rx pcr 50 Tx scr N A Rx scr N A Tx mbs N A ...

Страница 499: ... to multipoint Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppncons port portid vpi starting vpi vci starting vci type p2p p2mp Syntax Description Related Commands dsppncon Attributes port The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 vpi Starting VPI vci Starting VCI type Causes the system to display only point to point or poin...

Страница 500: ...011802 00 Called Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3d 000001011802 00 1 1 2 2 1 101 32 1 1 2 2 1 100 33 PTP No Calling Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3d 000001011802 00 Called Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3d 000001011802 00 1 1 2 2 2 200 34 1 1 6 6 0 49 8388609 PTP No Calling Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3f 000001011804 00 Called Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3d 000001011802 00 1 1 6 6 0 49 8388609 1...

Страница 501: ...ose 7 PXM a dsppnconstats 4 1 1 11 Call Statistics for 4 1 1 11 Incoming Call Attempts 209 Outgoing Call Attempts 8 Incoming Call Success 6 Outgoing Call Success 0 Incoming Call Failures 0 Outgoing Call Failures 209 Incoming Filtering Failures 0 Outgoing Filtering Failures 0 Incoming Routing Failures 0 Outgoing Routing Failures 209 Incoming CAC Failures 0 Outgoing CAC Failures 0 Incoming Timer Fai...

Страница 502: ... as requested in the traffic parameters of the call Incoming Timer Failures The number of signaling timers that timed out on incoming point to point and point to multipoint SVC SPVC calls received on this port Incoming Crankback Failures The number of crankback IEs received on this port for incoming point to point and point to multipoint SVC SPVC call attempts Outgoing Call Attempts The number of ...

Страница 503: ... Logical Node Port and Signaling Commands dsppnconstats Outgoing Timer Failures The number of signaling timers that timed out on outgoing point to point SVC SPVC calls sent from this port Outgoing Crankback Failures The number of crankback information elements sent from this port for outgoing signaling release messages ...

Страница 504: ...Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnctlvc portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfpnctlvc Attributes Example Display the configuration of control VCs on port 10 1 1 1 Geneva 7 PXM a dsppnctlvc 10 1 1 1 vc type pnnircc service category sig PCR 906 SCR 453 MBS 171 vc type sscop Parameter Provisioned service category sig PCR Not Provisioned SCR Not Provisioned MBS Not Provisioned...

Страница 505: ...Cs The types of control VCs are Service specific connection oriented protocol SSCOP PNNI routing control channel PNNI RCC Interim local management interface ILMI but only if ILMI is enabled To see the connection counts that include control VCs use the commands that operate on the CLI of the service modules dspln dsppart or dsprscprtn dspcd or dspport Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax d...

Страница 506: ...s require you to provide the logical ID and dsppnport is one command that can provide it Dynamic information such as Status of the port The number of point to point and point to multipoint connections The numbers of configured and active of SPVCs and SVCs 8850_NY 7 PXM a dspcons Local Port Vpi Vci Remote Port Vpi Vci State Owner 2 2 2 1 10 100 3 1 1 1 10 100 FAIL MASTER Local Addr 47 0091810000000...

Страница 507: ...rds on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnportcac portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfpnportcac Attributes Example Display the CAC parameters for port 3 2 2 4 8850_NY 7 PXM a dsppnportcac 3 2 2 4 cbr rt vbr nrt vbr ubr abr sig bookFactor 100 100 100 100 100 100 maxBw 100 0000 100 0000 100 0000 100 0000 100 0000 100 0000 minBw 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 100 0000 maxVc 100 1...

Страница 508: ...tion of applicable parameters Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnportcc portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfpnportcc Attributes Examples Display the call control configuration for port 3 1 1 1 8850_NY 8 PXM a dsppnportcc 3 1 1 1 maxP2mpRoot 1000 maxP2mpLeaf 4095 svc blocking option no spvc blocking option no 8850_NY 8 PXM a portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The ...

Страница 509: ...l port ID in decimal format Logical port ID in hexadecimal format Operational state of the port Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnportidmaps Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands none Attributes Example Display the mapping of physical port IDs to the logical IDs on the switch Note that the switch has not generated a logical ID for port 2 2 2 1 becaus...

Страница 510: ... Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnportloscallrel portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfpnportloscallrel Attributes Example First confirm that LOS call release is disabled on port 3 1 1 1 Enable it then confirm that it is enabled 8850_NY 8 PXM a dsppnportloscallrel 3 1 1 1 Call release on Los disabled 8850_NY 8 PXM a cnfpnportloscallrel 3 1 1 1 yes 8850_NY 8 PXM a dsppnportloscallrel 3 1 1 1 ...

Страница 511: ...nport displays the operational values Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppnportrange portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfpnportrange dsppnport Attributes Example Geneva 7 PXM a dsppnportrange minSvccVpi 0 maxSvccVpi 4095 minSvccVci 32 maxSvccVci 65535 minSvpcVpi 1 maxSvpcVpi 4095 Geneva 7 PXM a portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot por...

Страница 512: ...ate cells sec 351707 351707 351707 35170 7 351707 353207 Maximum Rx Cell Rate cells sec 351707 351707 351707 35170 7 351707 353207 Min Guarant Tx Cell Rate cells sec 0 0 0 0 0 1500 Min Guarant Rx Cell Rate cells sec 0 0 0 0 0 1500 Minimum Cell Loss Ratio Tx 10 8 6 6 6 8 Minimum Cell Loss Ratio Rx 10 8 6 6 6 8 Available Tx Cell Rate cells sec 344035 344035 344035 34403 5 344035 344035 Available Rx ...

Страница 513: ...ummaries see the section Description of the dsppnports Connection Summaries Note The total number of connections that the display shows does not include control VCs The types of control VCs are SSCOP PNNI RCC and ILMI if ILMI is enabled To see the connection counts that include control VCs use the commands that operate on the CLI of the service modules dspln dsppart or dsprscprtn dspcd and dspport...

Страница 514: ...nt or point to multipoint connections SVCC switched virtual channel connections SVPC switched virtual path connections SPVCD semi permanent virtual channel DAX connections SPVPD semi permanent virtual path DAX connections SPVCR active routed semi permanent virtual circuits SPVPR active routed semi permanent virtual paths Total of all the preceding types Configured SPVC endpoints for either point t...

Страница 515: ...s the following information in the four parts of the summary Number of connections Svcc 1 Number of configured endpoints 0 Total of 1 connection 2 endpoints 2 active intermediate Next a DAX connection has both endpoints on the same switch the DAX does not appear in Figure 6 1 The summary information for a DAX connection would appear as follows Number of connections SpvcD 1 Number of configured end...

Страница 516: ...spvc SpvcR Routed spvc Type Svcc Svpc SpvcD SpvpD SpvcR SpvpR Total p2p 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 p2mp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total 0 50000 Summary of total configured SPVC endpoints Type SpvcR SpvpR SpvcD SpvpD Total p2p 0 0 2 0 2 p2mp 0 0 0 0 0 Total 2 Per port status summary PortId LogicalId IF status Admin status ILMI state Conns 7 35 17251107 up up NotApplicable 0 7 36 17251108 up up NotApplicable 0 7 37 17251109...

Страница 517: ...e type for 3 1 1 1 is UNI and the UNI version is 3 1 On port 2 2 2 1 the interface type is NNI and the version is IISP 3 1 8850_NY 8 PXM a dsppnportsig 3 1 1 1 provisioned IF type uni version uni3 1 sigType private side network addrPlan aesa VpiVciAllocator n a HopCounterGen n a PassAlongCapab n a sigVpi 0 sigVci 5 rccVpi n a rccVci n a 8850_NY 8 PXM a dsppnportsig 2 2 2 1 provisioned IF type nni ...

Страница 518: ...ues as shown in Figure 6 2 The following parameters are displayed for each node ilmi Display all of the ilmi addresses in the peer group uni Display all of the uni addresses in the peer group static Display all of the static addresses in the peer group host Display all of the host addresses in the peer group all Display all of the addresses This is the default ATM Address displayed but not labeled...

Страница 519: ... group Geneva 7 PXM a dsppnsysaddr all 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 9409 f1f1 0030 9409 f1f1 01 160 Type host Port id 17251106 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 9409 f1f1 0030 9409 f1f1 99 160 Type host Port id 17251106 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 9409 f1f1 0011 1010 0000 01 160 Type host Port id 17251106 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 9409 f1f2 0000 0104 180b 00 160 47 1 1 1 of Bytes 2 1 Default PNNI peer group identifier 1 3...

Страница 520: ... 152 Type uni Port id 17045515 47 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 0000 0000 0000 152 Type uni Port id 17045516 Geneva 7 PXM a The following example includes the option host so dsppnsysaddr displays only the host addresses in the peer group Geneva 7 PXM a dsppnsysaddr host 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 ff0f ef38 0000 010b 180b 00 160 Type host Port id 17251106 47 0091 8100 0000 0030 ff0f ef38 0000 010d 180b...

Страница 521: ...psig portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfsig Attributes Example Display the signaling timers and crankback maximum for port 4 1 1 11 SanJose 7 PXM a dspsig 4 1 1 11 Signaling Timers for port 4 1 1 11 Timer Value secs t301 180 t303 4 t308 30 t310 10 t316 90 t317 60 t322 4 t397 180 t398 4 t399 14 Max Crankback 3 SanJose 7 PXM a portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shel...

Страница 522: ... Syntax Description Related Commands cnfsigdiag delsigdiag dspsigstats clrsigstats Attributes filter Display the information in the filter table rec Display the call failure records status Display global diagnostics status index This field can be used with the option filter or rec If used with filter the configuration of the specified indexed filter entry display If you don t specify an index conf...

Страница 523: ...55556666 777788889999 01 Called Address Mask FF FFFFFF000000000000000000 000000000000 00 Status active F I L T E R I N D E X 2 Display the records associated with index 1 SanJose 7 PXM a dspsigdiag rec 1 D I S P L A Y I N D E X 1 Scope internal Cast Type p2p Conn Indicator Setup Failure Connection Kind switched vc Service Category UBR Unspecified Bit Rate Clear Cause 0x29 Diagnostics NULL Incoming...

Страница 524: ... on AAL5 cells The cnffdonaal5 command lets you enable or disable frame discard for AAL5 cells The default is enabled Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspsigparm Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands cnffdonaal5 Attributes Example Determine whether frame discard for AAL5 cells is enabled on this switch SanJose 7 PXM a dspsigparm Global Signaling Paramete...

Страница 525: ...ys signaling statistics for a port See the Example section for a list of the types of statistics Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspsigstats portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfsigdiag delsigdiag dspsigdiag clrsigstats Attributes portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 Log nolog State active sta...

Страница 526: ... 2 1 1 8850_NY 8 PXM a dspsigstats 1 2 1 1 Signaling Statistics for 1 2 1 1 Message Rcv Xmt Call Proceeding 0 0 Connect 0 0 Connect Ack 0 0 Setup 0 0 Release 0 0 Release Complete 0 0 Add Party 0 0 Add Party Ack 0 0 Add Party Rej 0 0 Drop Party 0 0 Restart 0 0 Restart Ack 0 0 Status 0 0 Status Enquiry 0 0 Alerting 0 0 Notify 0 0 Progress 0 0 Last Cause Diag Crankback Cause 0 Diagnostic 0 0 0 0 Src ...

Страница 527: ...aling Commands dspsigstats Display the SPVC address first on port 1 1 1 1 then on port 1 1 4 4 p2spvc5 7 PXM a dspspvcaddr 1 1 1 1 Interface Id Soft VC Address es 1 1 1 1 47 0091 8100 0000 0010 7be9 2f6d 0000 0101 1801 00 p2spvc5 7 PXM a dspspvcaddr 1 1 4 4 Interface Id Soft VC Address es 1 1 4 4 47 0091 8100 0000 0010 7be9 2f6d 0000 0101 1804 00 ...

Страница 528: ...tch level SPVC address The switch comes with a default SPVC prefix and you can modify the prefix by executing cnfspvcprfx See description of cnfspvcprfx for more details Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspspvcprfx Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands cnfspvcprfx dspspvcaddr Attributes Example MGX8850 7 PXM a dspspvcprfx SPVC Node Prefix 47 009181000001...

Страница 529: ...psscop command displays information about the state of the link on the port status inquiry and response timers and statistics Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspsscop portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfsscop disablesscop dspsscopstats Attributes portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 Log nolog...

Страница 530: ...er 427 Poll Ack Sequence Number 427 Vt Pd 0 Vt Sq 1 Timer_IDLE 10 Active Timer_CC 1 Inactive Timer_POLL 1 Inactive Timer_KEEPALIVE 5 Inactive Timer_NO RESPONSE 30 Inactive Timer_T309 10 Inactive Max CC 10 Send Window 30 Recv Window 30 Current Retry Count 33932 Maximum Retry Count 10 AckQ count 0 RcvQ count 0 TxQ count 0 AckQ HWM 1 RcvQ HWM 0 TxQ HWM 1 Statistics Pdu s Sent 1011 Pdu s Received 1004...

Страница 531: ...op Attributes Examples SanJose 7 PXM a dspsscopstats 4 1 1 11 SSCOP Statistics for interface 4 1 1 11 Pdu s Sent 1045 Pdu s Received 1037 Pdu s Ignored 0 Begin 1 4 Begin Ack 0 1 Begin Reject 0 0 End 0 0 End Ack 0 0 Resync 0 0 Resync Ack 0 0 Sequenced Data 160 158 Sequenced Poll Data 0 0 Poll 440 442 Stat 436 440 Unsolicited Stat 0 0 Unassured Data 0 0 Mgmt Data 0 0 Unknown Pdu s 0 Lack of credit 0...

Страница 532: ...ands dspsvcparm dspsvcparm Display SVC Parameters Displays global SVC parameters for the node Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspsvcparm Related Commands cnfe164justify Attributes Example SanJose 7 PXM a dspsvcparm Global SVC parameters E164 Address Conversion Justification left SanJose 7 PXM a Log nolog State active standby Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 533: ... IP address The switch must have a trap IP assigned by the cnftrapip command Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsptrapip Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands cnftrapip dsptrapmgr addtrapmgr deltrapmgr Attributes Example Assign and confirm a trap IP address SanJose 7 PXM cnftrapip 172 27 27 184 SanJose 7 PXM dsptrapip Trap IP Address 172 27 27 184 SanJose...

Страница 534: ...e round trip delay in microseconds Use cnfconsegep to specify the segment endpoint if one does not already exist Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax tstpndelay portid vpi vci direction inbound outbound Syntax Description Related Commands cnfconsegep Attributes portid The portid is the PNNI physical port The format is shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 6 4 vpi VPI o...

Страница 535: ...se the uppnport command are as follows After you have downed the port for any reason by using the dnpnport command After you have pre configured a port by using the addpnport command see taddpnport description Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax uppnport portid Syntax Description Related Commands addpnport delpnport dnpnport dsppnport dsppnports Attributes portid The portid is the PNNI p...

Страница 536: ... 0 0 Total 0 50000 Summary of total configured SPVC endpoints Type SpvcR SpvpR SpvcD SpvpD Total p2p 0 0 0 0 0 p2mp 0 0 0 0 0 Total 0 Per port status summary PortId LogicalId IF status Admin status ILMI state Conns 7 35 17251107 up up Undefined 0 7 36 17251108 up up Undefined 0 7 37 17251109 up up Undefined 0 7 38 17251110 up up Undefined 0 3 1 1 1 16979969 down down Disable 0 8850_NY 8 PXM a SanJ...

Страница 537: ...order they appear in the syntax description or on line help To create a logical port for example the position dependent syntax is addport ifNum bay line guaranteedRate maxrate sctID ifType vpi For a keyword driven parameter a keyword must precede the value The keyword is preceded by a dash and followed by the parameter timeout secs for example The order you enter keyword driven parameters does not...

Страница 538: ... the AXSM 16 155 and AXSM 16 T3E3 16 as the name indicates The MGX 8850 node uses the concept of a bay The bay refers to the upper or lower location of a single height card The switch has a double height card cage so a single height back card necessarily occupies either an upper or lower position The T3 E3 OC 3 and OC 12 versions of the AXSM can have two back cards one in bay 1 upper location of t...

Страница 539: ...ay PNNI and the lower levels of logic identify the same element the sequence of commands also needs explanation When you configure logical ports for just one example you must complete certain tasks on the AXSM CLI before or after related PNNI tasks For certain commands this manual lists prerequisite commands or tasks For more details on the sequence of tasks refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Swi...

Страница 540: ...d so is usually omitted The slot number of the front card Subslot is the number of the bay where the back card resides This number is 1 or 2 Port is the physical line Subport corresponds to the resource partition on the AXSM For a UNI or NNI this resource partition is the same number as the logical port number ifNum on the AXSM For a virtual network to network interface VNNI the number does not di...

Страница 541: ...850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 7 SPVC and SVC Commands Identifying Physical and Logical Elements Bay 2 Line 1 Logical interface 1 or logical port 1 ...

Страница 542: ...nd can be viewed as the calling party The slave endpoint is the called endpoint The following are characteristics of this master slave arrangement When you add a slave endpoint the system returns a slave endpoint identifier You subsequently need to provide this slave endpoint identifier when specifying the master endpoint When you add the master endpoint you must provide the slave endpoint identif...

Страница 543: ...ID and interface type ifType parameters that are specified using the addport command determine which default traffic parameters are used Note The default values of the SCTs cannot be changed using the Cisco WAN Manager CWM Table 7 5 Default Traffic Parameters for AXSM PCR SCR MCR ICR MBS MFS CDVT VSI SIG N P N P N P N P N P N U N P CBR 1 50 N A N A N A dspmbsdft N U dspcdvtdft VBR RT 1 50 50 N A N...

Страница 544: ...me discard at the slave end point Local Only Parameters The parameters CDVT stats enable cc enable specified using cdvt stat cc are significant only at the endpoint where you enter them Therefore they can be different at each end of the connection Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Table 7 6 Ranges for PCR SCR and MCR for Each Line Type Parameter Range PCR Minimum value of 7 cell sec Maximum de...

Страница 545: ...yntax Description For the applicable parameters the local end is the point at which you are provisioning the connection ifNum The logical port number The range for AXSM is 1 60 This ifNum corresponds to the ifNum added through the addport command When adding an endpoint on a NNI port make sure that PNNI signaling is disabled on the PXM45 cnfpnportsig portid nniver none vpi Virtual path identifier ...

Страница 546: ...ifies the PCR from a local endpoint to a remote endpoint 3 5651328 cells per second Peak Cell Rate is the maximum cell rate for the connection at any time rpcr Remote Peak Cell Rate PCR Specifies the PCR from a remote endpoint to a local endpoint 3 5651328 cells per second Peak Cell Rate is the maximum cell rate for the connection at any time lscr Local Sustained Cell Rate SCR Specifies the SCR fr...

Страница 547: ... peak to peak cell delay variation expressed in microseconds cc Operations administration and maintenance continuity check OAM CC enter 1 to enable or 0 to disable The default is 0 To provision continuity checking you must enable this function at both ends of the connection otherwise a connection alarm results Therefore even as you create the connection with this parameter the connection goes into...

Страница 548: ...epend on a cost per link that you specify at every PNNI logical port in the network The applicable PNNI command is cnfpnni intf See the description of the administrative weight parameter for cnfpnni intf in the chapter PNNI Commands The cost of a route is as follows routing cost sum of all costs per link where The cost per link has been specified through cnfpnni intf at the egress of each logical ...

Страница 549: ...e defined for cbr serviceType lpcr and lscr must be defined for vbr serviceType rpcr and rscr must be defined for vbr serviceType lpcr must be defined for abr ubr serviceType rpcr must be defined for abr ubr serviceType Requested rcdv is too low Requested rctd is too low Requested max cell loss ratio clr is too high Requested cell rate lscr lpcr is too high Requested cell rate rscr rpcr is too hig...

Страница 550: ...E1000001C008051B730FFFFFF010B180100 10 40 master endpoint added successfully master endpoint id 00000E1000001C008051B730FFFFFF010B180100 10 50 In the following two examples the connection works with default values of SCR MCR derived from the PCR value specified using lpcr and rpcr keywords Defaults applied for the connection can be viewed by using the dspchan command MGX8850 1 11 AXSM a addcon 1 1...

Страница 551: ...delcon so you can delete the endpoints Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clrpncon portid all vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands dsppncon dspncons Attributes portid The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the format shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 7 4 all vpi Specifies either all VPIs on the port or a specific VPI Possible values are eithe...

Страница 552: ... 2 1 100 33 PTP No Calling Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3d 000001011802 00 Called Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3d 000001011802 00 1 1 2 2 2 200 34 1 1 6 6 0 49 8388609 PTP No Calling Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3f 000001011804 00 Called Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3d 000001011802 00 1 1 6 6 0 49 8388609 1 1 2 2 2 200 34 PTP No Calling Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3f 000001011804 00 Called A...

Страница 553: ...perations Clears existing call statistics for one logical port or all logical ports Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clrpnconstats portid Syntax Description Related Commands dsppnconstats Attributes portid The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the format shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 7 4 Log log State active Privilege SUPER_GP ...

Страница 554: ... port endpoint is 0 4095 vci The VCI range for a UNI port endpoint is 1 4095 The VCI range for a NNI port endpoint is 32 65535 For MPLS the recommended minimum VCI is 35 icr Keyword that specifies the Initial Cell Rate ICR in cells per second This is the rate at which the source should begin transmitting and is also the rate at which the source should resume transmitting after an idle period The r...

Страница 555: ...RM cell count CRM CDF can be either or the following Zero A power of 2 in the range 1 64 to 1 CRM limits the number of forward RM cells that may be sent in the absence of received backward RM cells CRM is an integer Its size is implementation specific frtt Keyword that specifies the Fixed Round Trip Time FRTT This is the sum of the fixed delays plus the propagation delays from the source to the de...

Страница 556: ...value rdf RDF value tbe TBE value nrm NRM value trm TRM value adtf ADTF value cdf CDF value fsd FSD value Syntax Description portid The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the format shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 7 4 rif Keyword that specifies the Rate Increase Factor RIF This is the factor by which to increase the Allowed Cell Rate ACR RIF is a power of 2 ...

Страница 557: ... is the time permitted to decrease the cell rate from the RM cell rate to the Allowed Cell Rate ACR for normal traffic The range is 1 to 1023 milliseconds cdf Keyword that specifies the Cutoff Decrease Factor CDF This controls the decrease in Allowed Cell Rate ACR associated with Missing RM cell count CRM CDF can be either or the following Zero A power of 2 in the range 1 64 to 1 CRM limits the nu...

Страница 558: ... new incoming calls but not existing calls You can execute cnfcdvtdft whether the port is in the provisioning state prior to addport on the service module or administratively up Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfcdvtdft portid service_category microseconds Syntax Description Related Commands dspcdvtdft Attributes portid The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the format...

Страница 559: ...d SVC Commands cnfcdvtdft Examples Specify a CDVT of 125000 microseconds for ABR connections on port 4 1 1 11 Check the results by executing dspcdvtdft for the port Geneva 7 PXM a cnfcdvtdft 4 1 1 11 abr 125000 Geneva 7 PXM a dspcdvtdft 4 1 1 11 cbr rt vbr nrt vbr ubr abr CDVT 250000 250000 250000 250000 125000 Geneva 7 PXM a ...

Страница 560: ...s local on one end is equal to the value entered as remote on the other end For example the lpcr on the slave endpoint should be same as the rpcr on the master endpoint and vice versa when you provision the connection at the other end If you modify traffic parameters after creating an SPVC you just modify them at either the master endpoint or the slave endpoint Traffic parameters such as CDV CTD a...

Страница 561: ... Max Cost segep OAM segment endpoint AXSM Syntax Description ifNum Logical port number On the AXSM the range is 1 60 vpi Virtual path identifier in the range 0 255 UNI or 0 4095 NNI or VNNI vci Virtual connection identifier VCI For a VCC on a UNI the range is 1 4095 On an NNI or VNNI the VCI range is 32 65535 For MPLS the recommended minimum VCI is 35 For a VPC the vci is 0 lpcr Keyword that speci...

Страница 562: ...e CDVT from a remote endpoint to a local endpoint 1 5000000 microseconds Cell Delay Variation Tolerance controls the time scale over which the PCR is policed lcdv Keyword that specifies the Cell Delay Variation CDV from a local endpoint to a remote endpoint 1 16777215 microseconds Cell Delay Variation is the peak to peak cell delay variation expressed in microseconds rcdv Keyword that specifies th...

Страница 563: ...ctions of a particular service type For example the cost per link is the same for all VBR 1 connections that PNNI controls on a given port but this cost can differ from all UBR 1 connections on the same port For a route under consideration the cost is the sum of all the cost per links at each egress in the forward and backward directions along the entire route In a one link route for example the c...

Страница 564: ...mand only for established calls Note Before executing this command be sure continuity checking is de activated If you leave it on continuity check failure occurs for the connection Use cnfconsegep in conjunction with conntrace for fault isolation Command s on Which Command Executes PXM45 Syntax cnfconsegep portid vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands cnfoamsegep dspoamsegep delconsegep dspco...

Страница 565: ...PVC of service type VBR The new configuration applies to new incoming calls not existing calls You can use cnfmbsdft whether the port is active or in the provisioning state Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfmbsdft portid service_category num of cell Syntax Description Related Commands dspmbsdft Attributes Examples Configure a default MBS of 10000 cells for nrt VBR cnfmbsdft 11 2 1 1...

Страница 566: ...s for newly established calls This command can be used regardless of the state of the port Command s on Which Command Executes PXM45 Syntax cnfoamsegep portid yes no Syntax Description Related Commands dspoamsegep cnfconsegep delconsegep Attributes portid The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the format shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 7 4 yes The port is co...

Страница 567: ...and Runs AXSM Syntax delcon ifnum vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands dspcon addcon cnfcon Attributes Example MGX8850 1 3 AXSM a delcon 1 10 40 Deletion successful ifnum Logical port number On the AXSM the range is 1 60 vpi Virtual path identifier in the range 0 255 UNI or 0 4095 NNI or VNNI vci Virtual connection identifier VCI For a VCC on a UNI the range is 1 4095 On an NNI or VNNI the ...

Страница 568: ...than necessary and repairing such damage could be very costly Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax delcons ifNum vpi vci num num conns to del verbose 1 0 Syntax Description Related Commands None Attributes ifNum The logical port number The range for AXSM is 1 60 vpi For a UNI the range is 0 255 For an NNI the range is 0 4095 vci For a VCC the range is 32 65535 For a VPC the only value is 0...

Страница 569: ... When the optional VCI is not present the segment endpoint is an F4 flow endpoint for VPCs Note The delconsegep command works for SVCs only Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax delconsegep portid vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands cnfoamsegep dspoamsegep cnfconsegep dspconsegep Attributes portid The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the format shelf slot subslot po...

Страница 570: ...tion use upcon Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dncon ifNum vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands upcon Attributes ifNum The logical port number The range for AXSM is 1 60 vpi Virtual path identifier On a UNI the range is 0 255 On an NNI the range is 0 4095 vci For a virtual connection VCC on a UNI the range is 1 4095 On an NNI or VNNI the VCI range is 32 65535 For MPLS the recom...

Страница 571: ...I Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspabrtparmdft portid Syntax Description portid has the format shelf slot subslot port subport Related Commands addcon cnfabr cnfabrtparmdft Attributes Example Display the default ABR parameters on portid 1 1 1 1 Default ABR Traffic Parameters For 1 1 1 1 RIF 7 1 512 RDF 4 1 4096 TBE 1048320 Cells NRM 5 32 Cells TRM 8 100 misc ADTF 50 0 50 Sec CDF 7 ...

Страница 572: ...mand Runs PXM45 Syntax dspcdvtdft portid Syntax Description Related Commands dspcdvtdft cnfcdvtdft Attributes Example Display the CDVT defaults for port 11 1 1 11 Geneva 7 PXM a dspcdvtdft 11 1 1 11 cbr rt vbr nrt vbr ubr abr CDVT 250000 250000 250000 250000 250000 portid The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the format shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 7 4 L...

Страница 573: ...nection was first added by displaying SPVC Established If a failure occurred the Attempts field shows the number of times the system attempted to re establish service If no failures have occurred the Attempts field contains a 0 L Util and R Util are the local and remote percent of utilization assigned to the connection Currently the default of 100 is the only value Cost values for the connection s...

Страница 574: ...ailed when you execute it at the slave endpoint See also dncon description The operational state is either OK or failed The operational state can apply to a connection regardless of the administrative state The traffic management parameters consist of Local and remote UPC parameters of PCR MBS CTD CDVT and so on A 1 in a field means that the parameter was not specified The characters N A indicate ...

Страница 575: ... Type cbr1 Oper Status FAIL Controller 2 Local PCR 10000 Remote PCR 1000 Local SCR N A Remote SCR N A Local CDV 1 Remote CDV 1 Local CTD 1 Remote CTD 1 Local MBS N A Remote MBS N A Local CDVT 1 Remote CDVT 1 Admin weight 1 Frame discard N OAM CC Config DISABLED Statistics DISABLED Loopback Type No Lpbk Dir N A Status No Lpbk RTD 0 us ifNum AXSM Logical interface port number For AXSM the range is 1...

Страница 576: ... N A Rx CDV N A Tx CTD N A Rx CTD N A Display information for vpi vci 10 100 on port ID 1 1 1 1 In this case port ID and remote and local NSAP addresses are the same so the connection is a DAXCON Also the Max Cost is 1 The Max Cost of 1 means no cost per link was specified for UBR service and therefore the Routing Cost is 0 node19 8 PXM a dspcon 1 1 1 1 10 100 Port Vpi Vci Owner State Local 1 1 1 ...

Страница 577: ...on the node For each port the display shows Number of active connections Number of failed connections Number of down connections Total number of connections Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspconinfo Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands none Attributes Example Display the SPVC summaries for the current node This example shows all connections as failed ...

Страница 578: ...mber Identifier Identifies the connection in the format port vpi vci Type Shows whether the connection is a VCC or a VPC SrvcType The service type VBR and so on See addcon description M S Indicates whether the endpoint specified by Identifier is the master or slave Upld The hexadecimal Upload number is an encoded timestamp the Cisco WAN Manager application uses to determine when a connection was c...

Страница 579: ...you would like to serve as the starting connection in the display vci The VPI of the connection that you would like to serve as the starting connection in the display state A specific connection state The display shows only the connections with the state you specify Note that on the PXM45 you must spell out the entire state keyword The keywords for specifying a state are failed only failed connect...

Страница 580: ...s the range 32 65535 filt Unlike on the PXM45 you do not use keywords for this parameter on the AXSM You enter only a number on the AXSM CLI to indicate the state The display criteria are 1 ingr for errors in the ingress direction 2 egr for errors in the egress direction 3 condn for connections where the switch has conditioned the connection 4 iffail for connection on a failed logical interface 5 ...

Страница 581: ...Remote Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 6 1 1 1 200 100 6 2 1 3 200 200 OK SLAVE 6 1 1 1 100 200 6 1 1 1 100 100 OK MASTER Local Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 Remote Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 6 1 1 1 200 100 6 2 1 3 200 200 OK SLAVE Local Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 Remote Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061803 0...

Страница 582: ... not present the segment endpoint is an F4 flow endpoint for VPCs This command is used only for established calls Note The delconsegep command works for SVCs only Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspconsegep portid vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands cnfoamsegep dspoamsegep cnfconsegep delconsegep Attributes portid The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the forma...

Страница 583: ...e port Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspmbsdft portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfmbsdft Attributes Example Display the MBS default for port 11 1 1 11 Geneva 7 PXM a dspmbsdft 11 1 1 11 rt vbr nrt vbr MBS 1024 1024 portid The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the format shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 7 4 Log no log State active s...

Страница 584: ...ATM Forum specification for cells used to monitor virtual circuits OAM cells provide a virtual circuit level loopback which demonstrates whether a circuit is up or not Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspoamsegep portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfoamsegep Attributes Example Display OAM Segment Endpoint for slot 1 port 1 MGX8850 7 a dspoamsegep 1 1 portid The portid represe...

Страница 585: ...ts described in the portCallTable and portAbrCallTable MIBs This command can be issued at any node in the route path Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsppncon portid vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands dsppncons Attributes portid The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the format shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 7 4 vpi VPI for the call De...

Страница 586: ...mbs N A Rx mbs N A Tx cdvt 250000 Tx frame discard option disable Rx frame discard option disable Max ctd N A Max Tx cdv N A Max Rx cdv N A Max Tx clr N A Max Rx clr N A NCCI value 47 00 91 81 00 00 00 00 30 71 f8 0e 4a 00 30 71 f8 0e 4a 01 00 01 Non ABR Call Port 5 3 VPI 33 VCI 44 CallRef call id CallLeafRef leaf id Calling address calling AESA address Calling subaddress calling AESA sub address ...

Страница 587: ...Ref oe_callid Call start time timestamp Connection type SVC Cast type point to point Bearer class bc Service category ABR Call clipping susceptibility no Tx conformance ABR Tx pcr tx pcr Rx pcr rx pcr Tx mcr tx mcr Rx mcr rx mcr Tx icr tx icr Rx icr rx icr Tx rif tx rif Rx rif rx rif Tx rdf tx rdf Rx rdf rx rdf Tx tbe tx tbe Rx tbe rx tbe Tx nrm tx nrm Rx nrm rx nrm Tx trm tx trm Rx trm rx trm Tx ...

Страница 588: ...ing vci type p2p p2mp ctrl Syntax Description Related Commands dsppncon Attributes port The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the format shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 7 4 vpi Keyword that specifies the VPI at which to begin displaying This keyword can be used only if you specify a portid vci Keyword that specifies the VCI at which to begin displaying This...

Страница 589: ...ed Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3d 000001011802 00 1 1 2 2 1 101 32 1 1 2 2 1 100 33 PTP No Calling Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3d 000001011802 00 Called Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3d 000001011802 00 1 1 2 2 2 200 34 1 1 6 6 0 49 8388609 PTP No Calling Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3f 000001011804 00 Called Addr 47 00918100000000107be92f3d 000001011802 00 1 1 6 6 0 49 8388609 1 1 2 2 2 200 3...

Страница 590: ...Failures 0 Incoming Filtering Failures 0 Outgoing Filtering Failures 0 Incoming Routing Failures 0 Outgoing Routing Failures 0 Incoming CAC Failures 0 Outgoing CAC Failures 0 Incoming Timer Failures 0 Outgoing Timer Failures 0 Incoming Crankback Failures 0 Outgoing Crankback Failures 0 Output Description portid The portid represents the PNNI physical port and has the format shelf slot subslot port...

Страница 591: ...for incoming point to point and point to multipoint SVC SPVC call attempts Outgoing Call Attempts Number of outgoing signalling messages Setup and AddParty sent from this port for call establishment Outgoing Call Success Number of outgoing signaling messages Connect and AddPartAck sent from this port which indicate successful call establishment Outgoing Call Failures Number of outgoing point to po...

Страница 592: ...mmand The typical use of dncon is some form of operational modification or troubleshooting Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax upcon ifNum vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands dncon Attributes ifNum The logical port number The range for AXSM is 1 60 vpi Virtual path identifier On the AXSM the range is 0 255 vci Virtual connection identifier On t he AXSM the range is 32 65535 for a ...

Страница 593: ...t description for information on the use of these commands Use dspports or dspport as needed to determine the port to enable or to see the status of the port after you enable it Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax upport ifNum Syntax Description Related Commands dspport dspports dnport Attributes Enable port 1 on the current card chicago 1 AXSM a upport 1 ifNum The logical port number The...

Страница 594: ...7 58 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 7 SPVC and SVC Commands upport ...

Страница 595: ...ameters does not matter although any preceding or succeeding position dependent parameters must appear as they do in the command syntax description In the following syntax example the command is used to delete more than one connection at a time The mandatory position dependent connection identifier consist of a logical port ifNum and the VPI and VCI of the first connection to delete After the conn...

Страница 596: ...of the AXSM can have two back cards one in bay 1 upper location of the back slot and the second in bay 2 lower slot The MGX AXSM 1 2488 OC 48 AXSM can have a back card in bay 1 only For further descriptions and illustrations of the card sets refer to Cisco MGX 8850 Hardware Installation Rel 2 0 Connection Capacities of the AXSM The SVC and SPVC connection capacities for the front card back card an...

Страница 597: ...mmands this manual lists prerequisite commands or tasks For more details on the sequence of tasks refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Software Configuration Guide Release 2 0 for more details of this sequence AXSM Format On a service module you identify the follow when you provision the capabilities of the card Slot Bay Line Logical port Port group Resource partition Not all of these elemen...

Страница 598: ...number does not directly correspond to the For each physical port number PNNI also generates a logical port number as an encrypted form of the physical port number The logical port number appears as an unformatted numerical string For example a PNNI physical port ID may have the form 1 1 2 2 so the PNNI logical port number would be 16848898 Where needed the descriptions in the PNNI command chapter...

Страница 599: ... and therefore the default for cnfpnportloscallrel is to retain all the calls for a temporary loss of connectivity but this can also have the effect of delaying the rerouting of connections The cnfpnportloscallrel command lets you direct the system to reroute calls without delay on a particular port Cards on Which Command Executes PXM45 Syntax cnfpnportloscallrel portid yes no Sybtax Description R...

Страница 600: ...in seconds that occurs between all subsequent reroute attempts After the fast retry interval base reaches the slow retry interval the switch attempts to reroute the connection at the rate of the slow retry interval No limit exists for the number of reroute attempts once the slow retry interval begins For example if the fast retry interval base is 50 100 millisecond intervals 5 seconds and the slow...

Страница 601: ...rrtparm Example Set the slow timer to 300 second intervals and the fast timer base to 7 seconds 70 x 100 milliseconds Check the results by executing dsprrtparm 8850_NY 7 PXM a cnfrrtparm slowtmr 300 fasttmrbase 70 8850_NY 7 PXM a dsprrtparm Global SPVC Retry Parameters Slow Retry Interval 300 sec Fast Retry Interval Base 70 in 100 msec 8850_NY 7 PXM a ...

Страница 602: ...s maximum cost by another name administrative weight AW Note If you do not specify a maxcost with either the addcon or cnfcon command the routing protocol uses the AW on only forward links to calculate a new route for the connection If the connection has a specified maxcost the routing protocol calculates possible routes by using the AW in both directions Usage Guidelines Note the following charac...

Страница 603: ...the port specified by portid Therefore if you want to groom all connections on the portid simply leave out the range command delineator interval Keyword that specifies the frequency at which grooming begins The units of measure are minutes The range is 10 10000 The default is 60 Counting starts at one of two moments The moment you execute cnfrteopt The starting time specified by TOD in cnfrteopt I...

Страница 604: ...lated Commands cnfrteoptthld optrte dsprteoptcnf dsprteoptstat Attributes Examples For logical port 2 on the lower bay of the service module in slot 1 configure 1 hour of connection grooming starting between 1 00 and 3 00 AM local time The range of SPVCs is 100 1000 through 100 10000 cnfrteopt 1 2 1 2 enable range 100 1000 100 10000 interval 60 tod 01 00 03 00 Log log State active Privilege GROUP1...

Страница 605: ...route optimization is a 30 reduction of the cost of a route Using this mechanism the PXM45 selects a given route if it costs 30 less than the cost of the current route With cnfrteoptthld you can change the percentage of routing cost improvement Syntax cnfrteoptthld percent Syntax Description Cards on Which Command Executes PXM45 Related Commands cnfrteopt optrte dsprteoptcnf dsprteoptstat Attribut...

Страница 606: ...ements for a partition and the actual resource utilization The output shows the configured bandwidth for user connections of all service classes The display also shows the load created by control VCs The control VCs are of three types SSCOP PNNI RCC and ILMI if ILMI is enabled The bandwidth allocations for SSCOP and PNNI RCC control VCs are configurable see cnfpnctlvc The bandwidth for an ILMI VC ...

Страница 607: ... Bw 0351708 0351708 VBR RT Avl Bw 0351708 0351708 VBR nRT Avl Bw 0351708 0351708 UBR Avl Bw 0351708 0351708 ABR Avl Bw 0351708 0351708 Table 8 5 Interface Load Info Descriptions Field Descriptions Maximum Channels The total maximum number of channels available on the interface Guaranteed Channels The maximum number of channels that are guaranteed to be available at the maximum bandwidth Igr Maximu...

Страница 608: ...ce Signaling CBR Constant Bit Rate Used for connections that require a high QoS and strict cell delay variation CDV VBR RT Variable Bit Rate Real Time Used for connections that have burst traffic and that require a strict cell delay variation CDV VBR nRT Variable Bit Rate non Real Time Used for connections that do not require end to end timing UBR Unspecified Bit Rate Used for connections that can...

Страница 609: ...utes PXM45 Syntax dsppnportloscallrel portid Sybtax Description Related Commands cnfpnportloscallrel Attributes Example First confirm that LOS call release is disabled on port 3 1 1 1 Enable it then confirm that it s enabled 8850_NY 8 PXM a dsppnportloscallrel 3 1 1 1 Call release on Los disabled 8850_NY 8 PXM a cnfpnportloscallrel 3 1 1 1 yes 8850_NY 8 PXM a dsppnportloscallrel 3 1 1 1 Call relea...

Страница 610: ...val time and fast timer base See the description of cnfrrtparm for the function of these intervals Cards on Which Command Executes PXM45 Syntax dsprrtparm Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands cnfrrtparm Attributes Example Display the current global reroute parameters for SPVCs The parameters are the defaults 8850_NY 7 PXM a dsprrtparm Global SPVC Retry Parameters Sl...

Страница 611: ...y of the optimization target by port and VPI VCI range Enable status of optimization Interval between times that optimization begins Start and stop times for route optimization Cards on Which Command Executes PXM45 Syntax dsprteoptcnf Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands cnfrteopt opte dsprteoptstat cnfrteoptthld Attributes Example Display the current route optimiza...

Страница 612: ...ns on the node The system default is 30 but you can configure a percent through the cnfrteoptthld command For more details on route optimization see the cnfrteopt description Cards on Which Command Executes PXM45 Syntax dsprteoptstat Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands cnfrteopt cnfrteoptthld optrte dsprteoptstat Attributes Example Display the current route optimiz...

Страница 613: ...arting vpi vci ending vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands cnfrteopt cnfrteoptthld dsprteoptcnf dsprteoptstat portid Port identifier has the format shelf slot subslot port subport vpi Keyword that specifies the vpi The range is 0 4095 vci Keyword that specifies the vci The range is 32 65535 range Keyword that specifies the range of connections for grooming The VPI of the starting SPVC must ...

Страница 614: ...Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 8 Network Optimization Commands optrte Attributes Example Immediately find a better route for the SPVC with vpi vci 1000 50000 on portid 1 2 1 1 pop20two 7 PXM a optrte vpi 1000 vci 50000 Log log State active Privilege GROUP1 ...

Страница 615: ... 0 0 0 172 29 23 1 3 0 2755 lnPci0 172 1 1 0 172 1 1 149 1 0 0 atm0 172 29 23 0 172 29 23 149 1 2 5275 lnPci0 ROUTE HOST TABLE destination gateway flags Refcnt Use Interface 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 sl0 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 5 1 0 lo0 172 29 23 3 172 1 1 149 5 0 3555 atm0 172 29 23 5 172 1 1 149 5 0 3304 atm0 172 29 23 7 172 1 1 149 5 0 3335 atm0 171 71 29 18 172 1 1 149 5 0 3304 atm0 172 29 23 18 172 ...

Страница 616: ... routing in the network layer of the system Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax routestatShow Related Commands routeShow Attributes Display the current IP routing statistics pinnacle 8 PXM a routestatShow routing 0 bad routing redirect 0 dynamically created route 0 new gateway due to redirects 0 destination found unreachable 11095 uses of a wildcard route pinnacle 8 PXM a Log no log Stat...

Страница 617: ... trigger the immediate re routing of a connection Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax rrtcon ifNum vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands dspcons dspcon Attributes ifNum The logical port number The range for AXSM is 1 60 vpi The VPI of the connection For UNI the range is 0 255 For NNI the range is 0 4095 vci The VCI of the connection For a VCC the vci range is 32 65535 For a VPC the ...

Страница 618: ...8 24 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 8 Network Optimization Commands rrtcon ...

Страница 619: ...u enter keyword driven parameters does not matter although any preceding or succeeding position dependent parameters must appear as they do in the command syntax description In the following syntax example the command is to delete more than one connection at a time The mandatory position dependent connection identifier consist of a logical port ifNum and the VPI and VCI of the first connection to ...

Страница 620: ...ements The Private Network to Network Interface PNNI control protocol and the service modules use different formats to identify the same entity For example the format of a logical port that you enter on an AXSM is different from the format you would enter on the PXM45 This section describes these formats in the PNNI and AXSM contexts and how they correspond to each other The parallel actions of co...

Страница 621: ...sociated with each element inside the square brackets The elements of the physical port ID are as follows The shelf is always 1 for the current product and so is usually omitted The slot number of the front card Subslot is the number of the bay where the back card resides This number is 1 or 2 Port is the physical line Subport corresponds to the resource partition on the AXSM For a UNI or NNI this...

Страница 622: ...ntifying Physical and Logical Elements As Table 9 2 shows a port to PNNI is a line on the AXSM and a subport to PNNI is a logical interface or logical port on an AXSM An example of a PNNI physical port identifier is 1 2 1 1 This portid corresponds to an AXSM with the following particulars Slot 1 Bay 2 Line 1 Logical interface 1 or logical port 1 ...

Страница 623: ...e See the cnfdiag command for a detailed description of MGX 8850 diagnostics Syntax abortofflinediag slot Syntax Description Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Related Commands cnfdiag cnfdiagall dspdiagcnf Attributes Caution If offline diagnostic is running on the AXSM the AXSM must be in the standby state Example abortofflinediag 1 slot The slot of the card for which to abort the offline dia...

Страница 624: ...he egress These commands generate one OAM cell for each command execution A connection can have only one loopback at a time Therefore you cannot add a loopback for both directions at the same time The loopback remains until you delete it by executing delchanloop To see the presence of connection loopbacks on a per port basis use dspchanloop The addchanloop command lets you specify the direction of...

Страница 625: ... occurs in command execution such as an attempt to add a channel loopback to a connection that already has a loopback pop20two 1 AXSM a addchanloop 4 1 50 Check for the presence of the loopback by displaying all channel loopbacks on port 4 pop20two 1 AXSM a dspchanloop 4 Port Type lVPI lVCI rVPI rVCI 4 igrLpbk 1 50 0 35 vci The VCI of the connection The range is 32 65535 loopback mode The mode of ...

Страница 626: ...lnloop ds3 sonet bay line lpb loopback type Note For AXSM cards the keyword ds3 applies to both T3 and E3 line types AXSM Syntax Description Related Commands dellnloop Attributes Example Adding a DS3 line in a loopback state MGX8850 1 11 AXSM a addlnloop ds3 1 1 lpb 2 ds3 sonet Specifies a DS3 line E3 or T3 or a SONET line OC 3c OC 12c OC 48c bay line Identifies the bay 1 or 2 and the number of th...

Страница 627: ...e action Caution Be absolutely sure you need to execute this command because it clears all configuration files on the PXM45 After clrallcnf you need to reconfigure the switch Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clrallcnf Related Commands restoreallcnf Attributes Example Clear all the configuration elements for all the cards in the node node1 7 PXM a clrallcnf All SM s config will be dele...

Страница 628: ...alarms that are displayed by dspalms and dspalmcnt are cleared The system does not display a response unless it detects a syntax error Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax clralmcnt bay line Syntax Description Related Commands dspalmcnt Attributes Example Clear the alarms on line 1 or the lower back card node1 1 2 AXSM a clralmcnt 2 1 bay line Identifies the bay 1 or 2 and the number of th...

Страница 629: ...tents of the error counters use the dspbecnt command Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax clrbecnt working bay line Syntax Description Related Commands addapsln cnfapsln delapsln dspapsln dspapslns switchapsln dspbecnt Attributes working bay line Identifies the bay 1 or 2 and the number of the line The line number is from 1 to the highest numbered line on the back card For the range of lin...

Страница 630: ...ters for received and transmitted cells on the current card See dspcdcnt for examples of the counter contents The information that clrcdcnt clears and that dspcdcnt displays primarily applies to debugging Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax clrcdcnt Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands dspcdcnt dspchancnt Attributes Log log State active Privilege SUPER_GP ...

Страница 631: ...dspchancnt Once you execute clrchancnt the previous counter contents are unrecoverable Note This command does not apply to OC 48 cards Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax clrchancnt ifNum vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands dspchancnt Attributes Example Clear all the connection counters on AXSM for connection 100 1000 on logical port 3 node1 1 AXSM a clrchancnt 3 100 1000 ifNum Th...

Страница 632: ...chancnts Clear Channel Counters clears the error counters for all connections on a card Clears the statistics counters on all connections Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax clrchancnts Syntax Description Related Commands dspchancnt clrchancnt Attributes Example SunnyVale 13 AXSM a clrchancnts No parameters Log no log State active Privilege SUPER_GP ...

Страница 633: ... all diagnostics error messages that are currently in memory Note See the cnfdiag command for a detailed description of MGX 8850 diagnostics Syntax clrdiagerr slot Syntax Description Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Related Commands dspdiagerr Attributes Example clrdiagerr 7 slot The slot of the card for which to clear the diagnostics errors Log No State active standby Privilege SERVICE_GP ...

Страница 634: ...y in memory The diagnostics statistics program keeps count of how many times diagnostics has run Note See the cnfdiag command for a detailed description of MGX 8850 diagnostics Syntax clrdiagstat slot Syntax Description Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Related Commands dspdiagstat Attributes Example clrdiagstat 7 slot The slot of the card for which to clear the diagnostics statistics Log no ...

Страница 635: ...velopers and individuals capable of internal troubleshooting To see the information that clrerr removes see dsperr After you enter clrerr the system prompts you to confirm that you want to clear all error log files Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clrerr s1 slot Syntax Description Related Commands dsperr Attributes Example Clear all error log files on the PXM45 pinnacle 7 PXM a clrerr...

Страница 636: ...slot For a list of the information fields in an error history file see the description of dsperrhist Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clrerrhist slot Syntax Description Related Commands dsperrhist Attributes Example Clear the error history for the current PXM45 The system returns a message indicating whether the operation succeeded pop20one 7 PXM a clrerrhist 7 Log of Errors and Failu...

Страница 637: ...tributes Example Clear the ILMI statistics for logical interface 1 resource partition 1 Before doing so confirm the existence of these entities by executing dspparts pop20two 1 AXSM a dspparts if part Ctlr egr egr ingr ingr min max min max min max Num ID ID GuarBw MaxBw GuarBw MaxBw vpi vpi vci vci conn conn 0001 0001 0001 0001 1 1 2 10000 10000 10000 10000 10 100 100 1000 0 10 pop20two 1 AXSM a c...

Страница 638: ...s of the counters The system returns a response only if an error occurs Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax clrlncnt bay line Syntax Description Related Commands dsplncnt Attributes Example Clear the line counters for line 1 in bay 1 on the current AXSM wilco 1 AXSM a clrlncnt 1 1 bay line Identifies the bay 1 or 2 and the number of the line The range for line can be 1 to the highest numb...

Страница 639: ...or all log files The log resumes accumulating event messages after the command executes Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clrlog log log Syntax Description Related Commands dsplog dsplogs Attributes Example Clear all event log files on the PXM45 card wilco 7 PXM a clrlog log Specifies the type of log file log to clear See dsplog for a list of the types of logs files Log log State activ...

Страница 640: ...ar Port Counter Clear counter values on a specific logical port Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax clrportcnt ifNum Syntax Description Related Commands clrportcnts dspportcnt Attributes Example Clear all the port counters on port 1 flyers01 17 AXSM a clrportcnt 1 ifNum The logical port number The range for AXSM is 1 60 Log log State active Privilege SUPER_GP ...

Страница 641: ...rent AXSM The system does not return a message unless a syntax error occurs such as a spurious character following the command on the CLI Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax clrportcnts Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands clrportcnt dspportcnt Attributes Example Clear all the port counters on the current AXSM flyers01 17 AXSM a clrportcnts Log log State ac...

Страница 642: ...In an MGX 8850 node the switching slot is the slot number of the PXM45 Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clrxbaralm slot plane Syntax Description Related Commands dspxbaralm dspswalms Attributes Example Clear the alarms for switch plane 0 in slot 7 The system returns no messages unless an error exists in the command syntax To see the results execute dspxbaralm pop20two 7 PXM a clrxbara...

Страница 643: ... the switching slot is the slot number of the PXM45 Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax clrxbarerrcnt slot plane Syntax Description Related Commands dspxbarerrcnt cnfxbarerrthresh dspxbarerrthresh dspswalms Attributes Example Clear the errors for switch plane 0 in slot 7 The system returns no messages unless an error exists in the command syntax To see the results execute dspxbarerrcnt p...

Страница 644: ...nd the test period of 15 minutes or 24 hours For example lnes15 indicates the number of errored seconds on the line layer during any 15 minute period See the Syntax Description for a list and definitions of all keywords Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax The required parameters are the line type the line identifier in the format bay line and the severity of the alarm minor or major All o...

Страница 645: ... during a 15 minute period secsev Severity Severity of the alarm 1 minor 2 major for SONET section seces15 ES15min Errored seconds during a 15 minute period seces24 ES24Hr Errored seconds during a 24 hour period secses15 SES15min Severely errored seconds during a 15 minute period secses24 SES24Hr Severely errored seconds during a 24 hour period secsefs15 SEFS15min Severely errored frame seconds du...

Страница 646: ...ons seconds during a 24 hour period uas15 UAS15min Unavailable seconds during a 15 minute period uas24 UAS24Hr Unavailable seconds during a 24 hour period dsev severity Severity of the alarm 1 minor 2 major for DS3 lcv15 LCV15min Code violations for a line during a 15 minute period lcv24 LCV24Hr Code violations for a line seconds during a 24 hour period les15 LES15min Line errored seconds during a...

Страница 647: ... a 24 hour period sefs15 SEFS15min Severely errored frame seconds during a 15 minute period sefs24 SEFS24Hr Severely errored frame seconds during a 24 hour period duas15 UAS15min Unavailable seconds during a 15 minute period duast24 UAS24Hr Unavailable seconds during a 24 hour period psev severity Severity of the alarm 1 minor 2 major for PLCP bcv15 CV15min Bipolar violation code violations during...

Страница 648: ...nd 7 respectively The code violations for a 15 minutes period and a 24 hour period are 75 and 750 respectively The unavailable seconds for a 15 minutes period and a 24 hour period are 10 and 10 respectively node4 1 AXSM a cnfalm sonetline 1 2 lnsev 2 lnes15 60 lnes24 600 lnses15 3 lnses24 7 lncv15 75 lncv24 750 lnuas15 10 lnuas24 10 Check the configuration by executing dspalmcnf for the line numbe...

Страница 649: ...Reliability Availability Serviceability RAS requirements demand that diagnostics be run periodically on the communications paths Consequently diagnostics should be running periodically on both active and standby cards but especially on standby cards It is important that standby cards are tested using diagnostics periodically and frequently so that when an active card fails the standby card has bee...

Страница 650: ...fCover parameter specifies the length of time that the offline diagnostics will run Note When an active card fails the shelf manager must stop the diagnostics on the standby card immediately reset and allow normal arbitration to occur When offline diagnostics is enable and scheduled numerous tests may be run depending on the implementation The possible tests that may be run on the PXM45 and AXSM c...

Страница 651: ...um test Syntax cnfdiag slot onEnb offEnb offCover offStart offDow Syntax Description Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 slot The slot of the card for which to configure the diagnostics onEnb Enable or disable online diagnostics The default is disable offEnb Enable or disable offline diagnostics The default is disable offCover Set the offline diagnostics coverage time to light medium or full li...

Страница 652: ...ence Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Commands cnfdiag Related Commands cnfdiagall dspdiagcnf Attributes Example cnfdiag 7 enable disable light 22 30 M W F Log no log State active Privilege SERVICE_GP ...

Страница 653: ...d description of MGX 8850 diagnostics Syntax cnfdiagall onEnb offEnb offCover offStart offDow Syntax Description Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Related Commands cnfdiag dspdiagcnf onEnb Enables online diagnostics offEnb Enables offline diagnostics offCover Sets the offline diagnostics coverage time to light medium or full light 5 minutes or less medium 30 minutes or less full unlimited off...

Страница 654: ... Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Commands cnfdiagall Attributes Example cnfdiagall enable disable light 22 30 M W F Log no log State active standby Privilege SERVICE_GP ...

Страница 655: ...therefore the default for cnfpnportloscallrel is to retain all the calls for a temporary loss of connectivity but this can also have the effect of delaying the rerouting of connections The cnfpnportloscallrel command lets you direct the system to reroute calls without delay on a particular port Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfpnportloscallrel portid yes no Syntax Description Relat...

Страница 656: ...me severity 0 2 clrcount almcount Syntax Description errtype A number that identifies the type of error as follows 1 Loss of synchronization LossOfSync 2 Transceiver error TranscieverErr 3 DisparityErr an accumulation of five ASIC level errors 4 ParityErr a parity error in the switch frame as a whole 5 HeaderCRCErr a CRC error for the switch frame header 6 PayloadCRCErr a CRC error for the switch ...

Страница 657: ...ample For Loss of Sync set the clear count for critical alarms to 200 pop20two 7 PXM a cnfxbarerrthresh 1 2000 2 200 301 In the sequence of command and arguments the only value that differs from the existing threshold is the clear count of 200 If the operation is successful the system displays the error threshold for the type of error you specified Loss of Sync in this example pop20two System Rev ...

Страница 658: ...archy of shelf management and crossbar related commands 1 dspndalms 2 dspswalms 3 dspxbaralm 4 dspxbarerrcnt Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax cnfxbarmgmt loadSharing autoShutdown planeAlarmThresh Syntax Description loadSharing 0 disable load sharing 1 enable load sharing However if a bad switch ASIC already exists the switch blocks the command 1 force load sharing to be disabled when ...

Страница 659: ...cify an error threshold of five links to declare a bad switch plane and enable auto shutdown The system returns a message only if an error occurs Use dspxbarmgmt to check the new configuration pop20two 7 PXM a cnfxbarmgmt 1 1 5 pop20two 7 PXM a dspxbarmgmt pop20two System Rev 02 01 Dec 06 2000 00 44 20 GMT MGX8850 Node Alarm MAJOR Load Sharing Enable Auto Shutdown Enable Plane Alarm Threshold 5 Lo...

Страница 660: ...sult Succ Fail Reason Desc InterfaceId EndptRef Originating Interface VPI Originating Interface VCI Originating Interface CallRef NodeId Egress Port Vpi Vci CallRef PhysPortid XXXX ZZZZ aaa bbb cccc eeee XXXX ZZZZ aaa bbb cccc eeee Terminating Interface VPI Terminating Interface VCI Terminating Interface CallRef portid The portid represents the PNNI logical port and has the format shelf slot subsl...

Страница 661: ...ter endpoints next using copychans Caution Improper use of this command can result in dangling unpaired endpoints in the network Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax copycons source destn rem remote Conn Id num num conns to add verbose 1 0 Syntax Description Related Commands addcon delcon source source ID The endpoint that is to be used as a template for copying specified in the format ifN...

Страница 662: ...ch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Commands copycons Attributes Example MGX8850 1 11 AXSM a copycons 3 10 50 3 10 60 num 10 Log log State active Privilege SERVICE_GP ...

Страница 663: ...errors Enable or disable the SPVC log To see whether the SPVC log is enabled use dspcons dbg Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dbgcon enable disable Syntax Description Related Commands dspcons dbg Attributes Example Enable the SPVC log MGX8850 8 PXM a dbgcon enable enable disable Enable or disable the SPVC log Type the entire word The default is disabled Log no log State active standby...

Страница 664: ...s see the description of addchanloop Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax delchanloop ifNumber vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands addchanloop dspchanloop Attributes Example Remove the loopback from VPI VCI 1 50 on logical port 4 pop20two 1 AXSM a delchanloop 4 1 50 ifNumber The logical port number The range for AXSM is 1 60 vpi The VPI of the connection The range is 0 4095 vci The...

Страница 665: ... cards the keyword ds3 applies to both T3 and E3 line types Syntax Description Related Commands addlnloop Attributes Example Deleting a DS3 loopback line MGX8850 1 11 AXSN a dellnloop ds3 1 6 lpb 3 Line loop back status will be changed Do you want to proceed Yes No ds3 sonet bay line Specifies a SONET line OC 3c OC 12c OC 48c or a DS3 line E3 or T3 the bay 1 for upper or 2 for lower and the line n...

Страница 666: ...on at the master endpoint the display shows the connection state as down If you execute either of these commands at the slave endpoint the state appears as failed To reactivate the connection use upcon Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dncon ifNum vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands upcon Attributes ifNum The logical port number The range for AXSM is 1 60 vpi Virtual path identi...

Страница 667: ...d delrscprtn to remove partitions Step 3 Remove all logical ports Use dspports to see existing logical ports on the line and delport to remove logical ports Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dnln bay line Syntax Description Related Commands dspln dsplns cnfln upln Attributes Example De activate line 1 in bay 1 MGX8850 1 AXSM a dnln 1 1 bay line Specifies a SONET line OC 3c OC 12c OC 48c...

Страница 668: ...I port through upport you cannot return the re routed connections to the upped port The PXM45 routes connections over the trunk as needed On a UNI the connections continue to exist but remain in the failed state until you enable the port by executing upport Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dnport ifNum Syntax Description Related Commands dspport dspports upport Attributes Example Disab...

Страница 669: ...ion to the configurable alarm types the output also shows instances of loss of cell delineation LOCD Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM AXSM Syntax dspalm ds3 e3 sonet ds1 e1 bay Line Syntax Description Related Commands cnfalm clralm dspalms dspalmcnt Attributes ds3 e3 sonet ds1 e1 Specifies a SONET line OC 3c OC 12c OC 48c DS3 line E3 line or DS1 line bay The bay 1 for upper or 2 for lower and...

Страница 670: ...at Alarm State TotalESs TotalSESs TotalSEFSs CurrentESs CurrentSESss Line Stat Alarm State TotalUASs CurrentUASs Path Stat Alarm State TotalUASs CurrentUASs LOCD Alarm State Clear APS Alarm State N A On another node the same bay line shows some of the possible errors loss of signal LOS errored seconds and severely errored seconds unavailable seconds MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspalm sonet 1 1 Line Number 1 ...

Страница 671: ...the type of alarms to display sonetsec Displays the section alarms for the given sonet line bay line sonetline Displays the line alarms for the given sonet line bay line sonetpath Displays the path alarms for the given sonet line bay line ds3 Displays the statistical alarms for the given DS3 line bay line e3 Displays the statistical alarms for the given E3 line bay line plcp Displays the PLCP alar...

Страница 672: ...on for AXSM cards MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspalmcnf sonetline 1 2 LineNum 1 2 Line Stat Alarm Severity No Alarm 15min Threshold 24hr Threshold Line ESs 60 600 Line SESs 3 7 Line CVs 75 750 Line UASs 10 10 MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspalmcnf sonetsec 1 1 LineNum 1 1 Section Stat Alarm Severity No Alarm 15min Threshold 24hr Threshold Section ESs 60 600 Section SESs 3 7 Section SEFSs 3 7 Section CVs 75 750 ...

Страница 673: ...mples Display the alarm count for T3 line 1 in bay 1 MGX8850 11 AXSM a dspalmcnt ds3 1 1 Line Num 2 1 CurrentLCV 9109365 CurrentLES 13 CurrentPCV 1 CurrentPES 1 CurrentPSES 0 CurrentSEFS 11 CurrentUAS 0 Num of LOS 1 Num of OOF 1 Num of RAI 0 Num of CCV 0 Num of FE 0 ds3 e3 plcp sonet ds1 e1 Keywords that specify the type of alarm counters see dspalmcnf for definitions to display for the given line...

Страница 674: ...apsed Time in sec 1634 Section PM Num of LOSs 1 Num of LOFs 1 CurrentESs 0 CurrentSESs 0 CurrentSEFSs 1 CurrentCVs 1 Line PM Num of AISs 0 Num of RFIs 0 Near End Far End CurrentESs 1 CurrentESs 1 CurrentSESs 0 CurrentSESs 0 CurrentCVs 1 CurrentCVs 1 CurrentUASs 0 CurrentUASs 0 Path PM Num of AISs 1 Num of RFIs 1 Near End Far End CurrentESs 0 CurrentESs 0 CurrentSESs 0 CurrentSESs 0 CurrentCVs 0 Cu...

Страница 675: ...yntax dspalms Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands dspalm clralm Attributes Example Display alarms for the lines on the current AXSM card MGX8850 1 AXSM a dspalms Line Number 1 1 Alarm State Section LOS Line Clear Path Clear Statistical Alarm State Section TotalESs TotalSESs TotalSEFSs CurrentESs CurrentSESs CurrentSEFSs Line TotalSESs TotalUASs CurrentUASs Path Tot...

Страница 676: ... Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Commands dspalms Alarm State Section Clear Line Clear Path Clear Statistical Alarm State Section Clear Line Clear Path Clear LOCD Alarm Clear Line Number 2 2 Alarm State Section Clear Line Clear Path Clear Statistical Alarm State Section Clear Line Clear Path Clear LOCD Alarm Clear ...

Страница 677: ...ters Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspbecnt working bay line Syntax Description Related Commands addapsln cnfapsln delapsln dspapsln dspapslns switchapsln dspapsbkplane dspbecnt Attributes working bay line Identifies the bay 1 or 2 and the number of the line The line number is from 1 to the highest numbered line on the back card For the range of line numbers on specific AXSM models ...

Страница 678: ...troller card the display does not include control VCs For a service module only which physical lines constitute a port group and the maximum number of connections in that port group A port group consists of one to many physical lines This maximum connection count is a function of the hardware interface type OC 3 OC 12 and so on The port group information also shows the number of existing SVCs SPVC...

Страница 679: ...rive State Active Active Active Serial Number SAK0405008B SAK0325009M 12345678901 Prim SW Rev 2 0 246 A1 Sec SW Rev 2 0 246 A1 Cur SW Rev 2 0 246 A1 Boot FW Rev 2 0 168 A1 800 level Rev 18 03 22 Orderable Part 800 06147 01 800 05787 01 800 12345 99 CLEI Code 0000000000 È 1234567898 Reset Reason On Reset From Shell Card Alarm NONE Failed Reason None Miscellaneous Information MGX8850 System Rev 02 0...

Страница 680: ...2001 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Commands dspcd Reset Reason On Power up Card SCT Id 2 Lines Ports Partitions SPVC SVC 1 1 1 2 1 Port Group 1 Chans supported 32512 Lines 1 1 Port Group 2 Chans supported 32512 Lines 1 2 Port Group 3 Chans supported 32512 Lines 2 1 Port Group 4 Chans supported 32512 Lines 2 2 ...

Страница 681: ...line is an example Major indicating service affecting errors This event indicates that a major service is damaged or lost but the existing traffic is not affected Minor indicating non service affecting errors or errors on a remote node Corrective action is appropriate to prevent a serious fault from developing An example is a fan failure where no subscribers are immediately affected but calamity c...

Страница 682: ...0 Line Alarm Slot 6 Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Port Alarm Slot 6 Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Feeder Alarm Slot 6 Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Channel Alarm Slot 6 Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Line Alarm Slot 9 Critical 1 Major 0 Minor 0 Port Alarm Slot 9 Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Feeder Alarm Slot 9 Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Channel Alarm Slot 9 Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Line Alarm Slot 10 Critical ...

Страница 683: ...2 Crit 0 Maj 0 Min 0 Use dspcdalms slot to see more detail MGX8850 7 PXM a dspcdalms 6 Card Alarm Summary Hardware Alarm Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Card State Alarm Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Disk Alarm Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Line Alarm Critical 3 Major 4 Minor 5 Port Alarm Critical 4 Major 5 Minor 6 Feeder Alarm Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Channel Alarm Critical 5 Major 6 Minor 7 MGX8850 7 PXM...

Страница 684: ...he display commands for the switch planes on the PXM45 may help you analyze cell flows See the dspxbar type commands Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspcdbucketcnt Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands dsplnbucketcnt all the dspxbar type of commands except dspxbarstatus Attributes Example Display the bucket counters for the current AXSM MGX8850 12 AXSM a...

Страница 685: ...witch planes within the total array of switch planes Total cells transferred between the service module and the backplane Cells to and from QE48 Undefined cells Total number of CLP0 and CLP1 cells that have been discarded Errored invalid and unsupported OAM cells Errored RM cells Cells transferred between and individual switch plane and each slot This information is centered on the switch fabric i...

Страница 686: ...rom xbar plane 5 0 Cells to xbar plane 6 0 Cells from xbar plane 6 0 Cells to xbar plane 7 0 Cells from xbar plane 7 0 Cells to xbar plane 8 0 Cells from xbar plane 8 0 Total cells to backplane 2993 Total cells from backplane 1189 Cells from QE48 2993 Cells to QE48 1188 Undefined cells 0 CLP0 cells discard 0 Errored OAM cells 0 CLP1 cells discard 0 Invalid OAM cells 0 Unsupported OAM cells 0 Error...

Страница 687: ...Card Errors Display information about card errors Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspcderrs Related Commands clrerr Attributes Example Display all card errors wilco 7 PXM a dspcderrs dspcderrs 08 05 95 18 53 05 tRootTask 3 Task failed scm 09 05 95 09 14 08 tRootTask 3 Task failed scm value 0 0x0 wilco 7 PXM a Log no log State active standby Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 688: ...he Revision level of the boot firmware Revision level of the system software Date and time of command execution including GMT offset Backplane serial number and its hardware revision level The IP address of the statistics master a workstation Type of card in the front and back slots and the active standby state of each Alarm status for each card and the shelf itself Redundancy configuration for ea...

Страница 689: ...ncy Slot Card State Type Status Slot Type 01 Active Active AXSM_1OC48 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 02 Active Active AXSM_1OC48 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 03 Active Active AXSM_16OC3 NONE 04 PRIMARY SLOT 04 Standby Active AXSM_16OC3 NONE 03 SECONDARY SLOT 05 Active Active AXSM_4OC12 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 06 Active Active AXSM_4OC12 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 07 Active Active PXM45 NONE 08 PRIMARY SLOT 08 Standby Ac...

Страница 690: ...on dspslotalms shows card level alarms such as a missing card or a disk problem on the PXM HD dspswalms shows alarms related to the switching hardware on the PXM45 The alarm monitoring function on the PXM45 uses two criteria to determine which alarm to display One criterion is alarm severity and the other is hierarchy The definition of each alarm severity comes from Bellcore TR NWT 000474 An alarm...

Страница 691: ... a major power alarm exists the dspcdstatus command displays the power alarm as the highest status alarm Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspcdstatus Syntax Description This command requires a slot number Related Commands dspndalms dspcdalms dspenvalms dspclkalms dspswalms dspalm AXSM dspalms AXSM Attributes Examples Display status of slot 11 The display shows a critical line alarm fo...

Страница 692: ...October 2001 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Commands dspcdstatus The display for dspalms shows that line 1 in bay 1 has LOS This example shows only the alarmed line A complete display shows the status of all lines Golden_U2 11 AXSM a dspalms Line Number 1 1 Alarm State Section LOS LOF Line AIS Path RDI ...

Страница 693: ...VC Syntax Description Related Commands dspchstats clrchancnt dspcdcnt Attributes Example Display channel counters on AXSM for 1 10 100 Golden_U2 11 AXSM a dspchancnt 1 10 100 Ingress Egress Instantaneous Qdepth 0 0 Arrival CLP0 cells 0 492305 Arrival CLP1 cells 0 0 Dscd CLP0 cells 0 Dscd CLP0 1 cells 0 Noncompliant cells 0 Arrival EFCI cells 0 0 Arrival EOF cells 0 0 ifNum The logical port number ...

Страница 694: ...n Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspchanloop ifNumber Syntax Description Related Commands addchanloop delchanloop Attributes Example Display any channel loopbacks on logical port 4 The display shows one connection with a loopback in the ingress direction pop20two 1 AXSM a dspchanloop 4 Port Type lVPI lVCI rVPI rVCI 4 igrLpbk 1 50 0 35 ifNumber The logical port number The range for AXSM is 1 6...

Страница 695: ...spchantests or dspcon to see the results The same test results presented by dspchantests appears in the dspcon display but dspchantests shows only the test results Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dspchantests ifNum vpi vci num count Syntax Description Related Commands tstdelay tstconseg dspcon Attributes ifNum The logical port number The range for AXSM is 1 60 vpi The VPI range for th...

Страница 696: ...to see test results Step 2 Check the results node19 1 AXSM a dspchantests 1 10 100 Connection Id Test Type Direction Result Round Trip Delay 01 0010 00100 OAM Lpbk ingress Success 40000 Run tstconseg for 1 10 100 then display the results Step 1 Run the test for 1 10 100 node19 1 AXSM a tstconseg 1 10 100 Test started Use dspcon dspchantests to see test results Step 2 Check the results node19 1 AXS...

Страница 697: ...e affecting errors or errors on a remote node Corrective action is appropriate to prevent a serious fault from developing An example is a fan failure where no subscribers are immediately affected but calamity could result if the situation persists Note that an accumulation of lower level alarms does equal a higher level alarm The dspclkalms command is part of a hierarchy of troubleshooting command...

Страница 698: ...ber 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Commands dspclkalms Example Display clock alarms pop20two 7 PXM a dspclkalms pop20two System Rev 02 00 Jul 31 2000 11 23 17 GMT MGX8850 Shelf Alarm NONE Clock Manager Alarm Summary Critical Major Minor 000 000 000 ...

Страница 699: ...ll source is presumed to be the internal oscillator Possible Sources The source of the clock has the format shelf slot subslot port subport More typically the source has the two part short hand form slot line or slot port If the source is an AXSM the format is slot line For a BITS clock the format is slot port The slot for a BITS clock is 7 The logical port is always 35 or 36 Port 35 refers to the...

Страница 700: ...or as the current clock source The exception to this final validation scenario occurs if the current Table 9 3 Reasons for Change of Clock State Reason Meaning okay The clock source is okay unknown reason The clock manager has no information for Reason no clock signal Loss of signal LOS on the clock source frequency too high The frequency has drifted too high frequency too low The frequency has dr...

Страница 701: ...lot 6 Also the primary source is providing the active clock and the system is configured for revertive behavior The primary and secondary clock reasons are okay pinnacle 7 PXM a dspclksrcs Primary clock type generic Primary clock source 6 2 Primary clock status good Primary clock reason okay Secondary clock type generic Secondary clock source 6 3 Secondary clock status good Secondary clock reason ...

Страница 702: ...nnection was first added by displaying SPVC Established If a failure occurred the Attempts field shows the number of times the system attempted to re establish service If no failures have occurred the Attempts field contains a 0 L Util and R Util are the local and remote percent of utilization assigned to the connection Currently the default of 100 is the only value Cost values for the connection ...

Страница 703: ...when you execute it at the slave endpoint See also dncon description The operational state is either OK or failed The operational state can apply to a connection regardless of the administrative state The traffic management parameters consist of Local and remote UPC parameters of PCR MBS CTD CDVT and so on A 1 in a field means that the parameter was not specified The characters N A indicate that t...

Страница 704: ...atus ADMN UP Service Type cbr1 Oper Status FAIL Controller 2 Local PCR 10000 Remote PCR 1000 Local SCR N A Remote SCR N A Local CDV 1 Remote CDV 1 Local CTD 1 Remote CTD 1 Local MBS N A Remote MBS N A Local CDVT 1 Remote CDVT 1 Admin weight 1 Frame discard N OAM CC Config DISABLED Statistics DISABLED ifNum AXSM Logical interface port number For AXSM the range is 1 60 portid PXM45 The portid repres...

Страница 705: ...rs Tx PCR 50 Rx PCR 50 Tx CDV N A Rx CDV N A Tx CTD N A Rx CTD N A Display information for vpi vci 10 100 on port ID 1 1 1 1 In this case port ID and remote and local NSAP addresses are the same so the connection is a DAXCON Also the Max Cost is 1 The Max Cost of 1 means no cost per link was specified for UBR service and therefore the Routing Cost is 0 node19 8 PXM a dspcon 1 1 1 1 10 100 Port Vpi...

Страница 706: ...tions as a result of dncon Number of alarm indication AIS failures Number of A bit failures Total number of connections Note that dspconinfo checks for the down state at the master end of the connection status at the slave endpoint is failed See also the descriptions for dncon and dspcon Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspconinfo port portid Syntax Description Related Commands none A...

Страница 707: ...ample Display the SPVC summaries for the current node svcswp10 7 PXM a dspconinfo Local Port Active Fail AISFail ABITFail Down Total 5 4 3998 0 0 0 0 3998 6 4 3997 0 0 0 0 3997 An example of an individual port follows The display shows 1096 connections on 11 1 1 11 Geneva 7 PXM a dspconinfo port 11 1 1 11 Local Port Active Failed Total 11 1 1 11 1096 0 1096 ...

Страница 708: ...number Identifier Identifies the connection in the format port vpi vci Type Shows whether the connection is a VCC or a VPC SrvcType The service type VBR and so on See addcon description M S Indicates whether the endpoint specified by Identifier is the master or slave Upld The hexadecimal Upload number is an encoded timestamp the Cisco WAN Manager application uses to determine when a connection was...

Страница 709: ...at you would like to serve as the starting connection in the display vci The VPI of the connection that you would like to serve as the starting connection in the display state A specific connection state The display shows only the connections with the state you specify Note that on the PXM45 you must spell out the entire state keyword The keywords for specifying a state are failed only failed conn...

Страница 710: ...he range 32 65535 filt Unlike on the PXM45 you do not use keywords for this parameter on the AXSM You enter only a number on the AXSM CLI to indicate the state The display criteria are 1 ingr for errors in the ingress direction 2 egr for errors in the egress direction 3 condn for connections where the switch has conditioned the connection 4 iffail for connection on a failed logical interface 5 ccf...

Страница 711: ... Remote Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 6 1 1 1 200 100 6 2 1 3 200 200 OK SLAVE 6 1 1 1 100 200 6 1 1 1 100 100 OK MASTER Local Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 Remote Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 6 1 1 1 200 100 6 2 1 3 200 200 OK SLAVE Local Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061801 00 Remote Addr 47 00918100000000107b65f33d 000001061803 ...

Страница 712: ...dbg command shows whether the SPVC log is enabled The dbgcon command lets you enable or disable this log Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspcons dbg Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands dbgcon Attributes Examples Determine whether SPVC logging is enabled The output shows that the log is disabled MGX8850 8 PXM a dspcons dbg Global SPVC Event Log Status ...

Страница 713: ...ntroller In this example the switch has only one controller PNNI The display also shows that the controller is internal slot 7 and has the optional user specified name PNNITWO Apart from controller information the display shows that no shelf alarms exist pop20two 7 PXM a dspcontrollers pop20two System Rev 02 00 Jul 30 2000 09 39 36 GMT MGX8850 Shelf Alarm NONE Number of Controllers 1 Controller Na...

Страница 714: ...ing time and the days of the week SMTWTFS that the offline diagnostics runs Coverage indicates the length of time that the diagnostics will run as follows light 5 minutes or less medium 30 minutes or less full 60 minutes or more Note See the cnfdiag command for a detailed description of MGX 8850 diagnostics Syntax dspdiagcnf Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Cards on Which This C...

Страница 715: ...2 00 S 11enabledisablelight24 15 M W F 12disableenablefull11 00 S 13enableenablelight13 15 M W F 14enableenablemedium01 00 M W F 15enableenablefull02 30 M W F 16disabledisablelight00 00SMTWTFS 17disabledisablelight00 00SMTWTFS 18disabledisablelight00 00SMTWTFS 19disabledisablelight00 00SMTWTFS 20disabledisablelight00 00SMTWTFS 21disabledisablelight00 00SMTWTFS 22disabledisablelight00 00SMTWTFS 23d...

Страница 716: ...rds on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspdiagerr online offline Syntax Description Related Commands clrdiagerr Attributes Example MGX8850 7 PXM a dspdiagerr offline Slot Date Time Message 1 2 24 Aug 13 35 SAR send failed 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 18 Aug 03 24 HUMVEE IRQ test failed 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 online offline Specify whether to display the online or the offline diagnostics e...

Страница 717: ...9 99 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Commands dspdiagerr 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ...

Страница 718: ...nd online diagnostics Note See the cnfdiag command for a detailed description of MGX 8850 diagnostics Syntax dspdiagstat slot Syntax Description Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Related Commands clrdiagstat Attributes Example pop20two 7 PXM a dspdiagstat 7 Slot 7 diagnostics statistics online diag attempted 0x00000000 online diag failed 0x00000000 offline diag attempted 0x00000000 offline di...

Страница 719: ...agstatus Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Related Commands cnfdiag cnfdiagall Attributes Example pop20one 7 PXM a dspdiagstatus SlotStateRole 1ReadyACTIVE CARD ROLE 2ReadyACTIVE CARD ROLE 3OfflineSTANDBY CARD ROLE 4OnlineACTIVE CARD ROLE 5ReadyACTIVE CARD ROLE 6OfflineSTANDBY CARD ROLE 7ReadyACTIVE CARD ROLE 8OnlineACTIVE CARD ROLE 9IdleACT...

Страница 720: ...RD ROLE 17IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 18IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 19IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 20IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 21IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 22IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 23IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 24IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 25IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 26IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 27IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 28IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 29IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 30IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 31IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE 32IdleACTIVE CARD ROLE ...

Страница 721: ...s or errors on a remote node Corrective action is appropriate to prevent a serious fault from developing An example is a fan failure where no subscribers are immediately affected but calamity could result if the situation persists Note that an accumulation of lower level alarms does equal a higher level alarm The dspenvalms command is part of a hierarchy of troubleshooting commands you can execute...

Страница 722: ...p Fan Tray 1 2000 RPM 3504 Normal Top Fan Tray 2 2000 RPM 3498 Normal Top Fan Tray 3 2000 RPM 3576 Normal Top Fan Tray 4 2000 RPM 3492 Normal Top Fan Tray 5 2000 RPM 3474 Normal Top Fan Tray 6 2000 RPM 3564 Normal Top Fan Tray 7 2000 RPM 3462 Normal Top Fan Tray 8 2000 RPM 3366 Normal Top Fan Tray 9 2000 RPM 3444 Normal Bottom Fan Tray 1 2000 RPM 0 Missing Bottom Fan Tray 2 2000 RPM 0 Missing Bott...

Страница 723: ...Normal Top Fan Tray 4 2000 RPM 3498 Normal Top Fan Tray 5 2000 RPM 3480 Normal Top Fan Tray 6 2000 RPM 3570 Normal Top Fan Tray 7 2000 RPM 3468 Normal Top Fan Tray 8 2000 RPM 3366 Normal Top Fan Tray 9 2000 RPM 3444 Normal Bottom Fan Tray 1 2000 RPM 0 Missing Bottom Fan Tray 2 2000 RPM 0 Missing Bottom Fan Tray 3 2000 RPM 0 Missing Bottom Fan Tray 4 2000 RPM 0 Missing Bottom Fan Tray 5 2000 RPM 0 ...

Страница 724: ...slot The value of slot is any slot in the switch en An option that lets you specify a particular error record You can list all the errors by using dsperr without this parameter and note the Error Num then display just that error record tr This option allows you specify 3 options for printing trace data P L or N If tr is not specified the trace data is printed normally P Pause prompts before printi...

Страница 725: ... Stack Trace 0x80694668 vxTaskEntry 00c sysTaskSetup 0 0x80159068 sysTaskSetup 0a4 emFaultMgrTaskEntry 0 0x80237950 emFaultMgrTaskEntry 114 ssiIpcComEpWait 0 0x8016313c ssiIpcComEpWait 070 ssi_ipc_mhdlr_receive_loop 0 0x80165e34 ssi_ipc_mhdlr_receive_loop 100 ssi_ipc_mhdlr_msg_receive 0 0x801666a8 ssi_ipc_mhdlr_msg_receive 054 fmFaultMgrTaskHandler 0 0x80237434 fmFaultMgrTaskHandler 0b0 cemaFmPhyP...

Страница 726: ...Alternatively you can clear the error history by executing clrerrhist If no entries exist in the history the system returns the message Nothing is logged Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsperrhist slot Syntax Description Related Commands clrerrhist Attributes Examples Display the error history for the current PXM45 This PXM45 resides in slot 8 jdlenoir 8 PXM a dsperrhist Log of Error...

Страница 727: ... slot 1 pop20two 7 PXM a dsperrhist 1 Log of Errors and Failures Slot 1 Entry Event EventName TimeStamp General 01 0x0005 SHM_CDF_DISCOVER_TMR_POP 11 29 2000 16 45 18 02 0x0001 SHM_CDF_INVALID_SW_ID 11 29 2000 16 45 48 03 0x0002 SHM_CDF_SW_DNLD_FAILED 11 29 2000 16 51 17 04 0x0005 SHM_CDF_DISCOVER_TMR_POP 12 26 2000 16 23 19 Hardware Alarm 01 0x5000 Humvee Non Fatal Minor 12 18 2000 16 48 36 02 0x...

Страница 728: ... dspilmis clrilmicnt dnilmi upilmi Attributes Example Display the ILMI counters for logical port 1 on the current AXSM card pinnacle3 1 2 AXSM a dspilmicnt 1 Port Num 1 SNMPPDUsReceived 0 Get RequestsReceived 0 GetNextRequestsReceived 0 SetRequestsReceived 0 TrapReceived 0 GetResponseReceived 0 GetResponseTransmitted 0 GetRequestTransmitted 0 TrapsTransmitted 0 InvalidPDUReceived 0 Asn1ParseError ...

Страница 729: ...ntax Description Related Commands upln cnfln delln Attributes Examples Display T3 line 1 on the current AXSM pinnacle 2 AXSM a dspln ds3 1 2 LineNum 1 2 LineEnable Down LineType ds3cbitadm LineCoding ds3B3ZS LineLength meters 0 LineOOFCriteria fBits3Of8 LineAIScBitsCheck Check LineLoopback NoLoop Xmt Clock source localTiming LineRcvFEACValidation 4 out of 5 FEAC codes ds3 Command delineator that p...

Страница 730: ...OC 12 AXSM pop20two 1 AXSM a dspln sonet 2 1 Line Number 2 1 Admin Status Up Alarm Status Clear Loopback NoLoop APS enabled Disable Frame Scrambling Enable Number of ports 1 Xmt Clock source localTiming Number of partitions 1 Line Type sonetSts12c Number of SPVC 0 Medium Type SONET SDH SONET Number of SVC 4 Medium Time Elapsed 506223 Medium Valid Intervals 96 Medium Line Type ShortSMF ...

Страница 731: ...sage parameter control UPC cells with CLP0 Total UPC cells Total non compliant UPC cells An asterisk indicates the displayed field does not apply to the AXSM 1 2488 Note Some counters apply to both the ingress direction and the egress direction Some apply to only the ingress direction See the example output Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM AXSM Syntax dsplncnt bay line Syntax Description Rela...

Страница 732: ...ters for line 1 in bay 1 MGX8850 11 AXSM a dsplncnt 1 1 Line Number 1 1 Ingress Egress CLP0 Cells 0 0 CLP1 Cells 0 0 Valid OAM Cells 0 0 Err OAM Cells 0 0 Invalid VPI VCI PTI Cells 0 0 Non zero GFC Cells 0 Last Unknown VPI 0 Last Unknown VCI 0 Discard HecErr Cells 115 Corrected HecErr Cells 0 NOTE Counters with do NOT apply to AXSM 1 2488 OC48 Log no log State active standby Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 733: ...es to only T3 or E3 The medium line type long reach single mode fiber for example The alarm status clear critical and so on For information on an individual line use dspln Also the dspln command shows the transmit clock configuration if one exists Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax dsplns Related Commands cnfln delln dspcds dspln upln Attributes Example Display the configuration of the l...

Страница 734: ... ds3cbitadm NoLoop 0 3Of8Bits Check Clear 1 2 Down ds3cbitadm NoLoop 0 3Of8Bits Check Clear 1 3 Down ds3cbitadm NoLoop 0 3Of8Bits Check Clear 1 4 Down ds3cbitadm NoLoop 0 3Of8Bits Check Clear 1 5 Down ds3cbitadm NoLoop 0 3Of8Bits Check Clear 1 6 Down ds3cbitadm NoLoop 0 3Of8Bits Check Clear 1 7 Down ds3cbitadm NoLoop 0 3Of8Bits Check Clear 1 8 Down ds3cbitadm NoLoop 0 3Of8Bits Check Clear 2 1 Down...

Страница 735: ...y only severe errors and only for a particular slot The Syntax Description describes each parameter Briefly their functions are to Specify an individual log file Target a specific task Specify an area of system functionality called a module in the syntax Display messages of a particular severity Specify relative time periods in which errors may have occurred Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 ...

Страница 736: ...recover the platform or service by posting a minor alarm condition Examples of minor alerts are loss of some tftp or telnet sessions and loss of statistics or other non critical features 4 EVENT_ERROR This severity indicates that an error occurred but is not sever enough or it does not know the scope of its implication to be more sever Most detected failures are reported with this severity then th...

Страница 737: ...2000 15 18 17 CLI 7 CMDLOG tTnInTsk01 0x8037558c cliCmdLog cisco telnet 01 login 07 00232 11 16 2000 15 18 12 CLI 7 CLITNLOG Display all logged events for slot 11 Note that the number 11 appears at the beginning of each log entry This example shows the first of multiple screens jbscott 7 PXM a dsplog sl 11 11 00032 11 16 2000 16 35 34 CLI 7 CMDLOG tSmInTsk03 0x801ef16c cliCmdLog superuser smterm 0...

Страница 738: ...t and thus determine specific contents to view when you execute dsplog Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsplogs Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands dsplog Attributes Example The output shows that one log file exists To view the contents of the log file 1 you would enter dsplog log 1 See description of dsplog jdlenoir 7 PXM a dsplogs Current Event log n...

Страница 739: ... specific or other troubleshooting commands Use the help or on the CLI of the other card to see available alarm commands alm for example The definition of each alarm severity comes from Bellcore TR NWT 000474 An alarm can be Critical indicating complete non recoverable failure loss of data and do on The failed entity must be restored A power failure or a line being disconnected is an example Major...

Страница 740: ...s shows that both card alarms are on the card in slot 8 the standby PXM45 the last line of the output recommends using dspcdalms with a specific slot to see more details ITNODE3 7 PXM a dspcdalms Card Alarm Summary Slot Critical Major Minor 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 8 0 2 0 9 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 Use dspcdalms slot to see more detail Exec...

Страница 741: ...also explains the disk error ITNODE3 7 PXM a dspcds ITNODE3 System Rev 02 00 Dec 02 2000 13 50 15 PST Backplane Serial No SAA03140750 Bp HW Rev B0 GMT Offset 8 Node Alarm MAJOR Card Front Back Card Alarm Redundant Redundancy Slot Card State Type Status Slot Type 01 Active Active AXSM_16T3E3 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 02 Empty 03 Active Active AXSM_16OC3 NONE NA NO REDUNDANCY 04 Empty 05 Active Active A...

Страница 742: ... PXM45 Syntax dsppnportloscallrel portid Syntax Description Related Commands cnfpnportloscallrel Attributes Example First confirm that LOS call release is disabled on port 3 1 1 1 Enable it then confirm that it s enabled 8850_NY 8 PXM a dsppnportloscallrel 3 1 1 1 Call release on Los disabled 8850_NY 8 PXM a cnfpnportloscallrel 3 1 1 1 yes 8850_NY 8 PXM a dsppnportloscallrel 3 1 1 1 Call release o...

Страница 743: ...lay Port Counters Displays ATM cell counters for a logical port Refer to the example for contents Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM AXSM Syntax dspportcnt ifNum Syntax Description Related Commands dspports dspport cnfport dspcds Attributes ifNum Logical port number The range depends on the card For AXSM the range 1 60 Log no log State active standby Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 744: ... Running Avg cps Peak Arrival CLP0 Ing 0000000000000000000000 0 0 Arrival CLP1 Ing 0000000000000000000000 0 0 Ar CLP0 discard Ing 0000000000000000000000 0 0 Ar CLP1 discard Ing 0000000000000000000000 0 0 Departure CLP0 Ing 0000000000000000000000 0 0 Departure CLP1 Ing 0000000000000000000000 0 0 Arrival CLP0 Egr 0000000000000000000000 0 0 Arrival CLP1 Egr 0000000000000000000000 0 0 Ar CLP0 discard ...

Страница 745: ... Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 AXSM Syntax dspprfhist Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Attributes Example Display the performance history on the current AXSM The example display shows a completely idle system pop20two 1 AXSM a dspprfhist CURRENT TIME 0 45 4 Sample 0 0 44 27 From 0 44 47 To TASK TaskId INTERRUPT 0 0000 KERNEL 0 0000 IDLE 100 0000 UNKOWN 0 0000 Sample 1 0...

Страница 746: ... can originate in any of the following The backplane or any other part of signal path that connects a service module with a switch ASIC Crossbar ASIC on the PXM45 Buffer circuitry on a service module The definition of each alarm severity comes from Bellcore TR NWT 000474 An alarm can be Critical indicating complete non recoverable failure loss of data and do on The failed entity must be restored A...

Страница 747: ... Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Commands dspswalm Attributes Examples Display switching alarms node_chi 8 PXM a dspswalms Node Switching Alarm Summary Card Crossbar Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Crossbar Fabric Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Humvee Alarm Critical 0 Major 0 Minor 0 Log no log State active Privilege ANYUSER ...

Страница 748: ...ad trap flag stats Next trap sequence number Of these elements the IP address and port number result from addtrapmgr Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dsptrapmgr Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands addtrapmgr deltrapmgr Attributes Example Display trap managers node19 8 PXM a dsptrapmgr ipAddress PortNum RowStatus ReadTrapFlag NextTrapSeqNum 171 71 55 21...

Страница 749: ...witch fabric consisting of all the switch ASICs in total forms a mesh each switch ASIC communicates with each card and each card can use any ASIC Therefore if one ASIC becomes inoperative the switching fabric continues to support new or existing connections within the switch but the throughput falls far short of the maximum Of less drastic effect would be a condition where one backplane trace can ...

Страница 750: ...s for a slot The redundancy mode is always Remap Remap means that the switching fabric automatically maps cell transfers to the correct slot if a switchover occurs in a redundant pair Note that if a switchover occurs the logical slot number in the endpoint ID stays the same The Slot column for Redundancy Configuration shows whether card redundancy exists as follows if the slot number under Redunda...

Страница 751: ...ct Asic Revision 1 Slot BACK PRESSURE DISABLE REQUEST DISABLE DATA REDUNDANCY CONFIG No Grant Mode Dest Src Dest Src Mode Slot 1 Valid InBand No No No No Remap 1 2 Valid InBand No No No No Remap 2 3 Valid InBand No No No No Remap 3 4 Valid InBand No No No No Remap 4 5 Valid InBand No No No No Remap 5 6 Valid InBand No No No No Remap 6 7 Valid InBand No No No No Remap 7 8 Valid InBand No No No No R...

Страница 752: ... hardware development and therefore is not useful for troubleshooting at the network or node level For troubleshooting at the switch level use dspndalms and dspswalms For fault isolation after you execute dspxbaralm you can survey the possible errors illustrated in the example The following is a top down sequence of alarm related commands 1 dspndalms 2 dspswalms 3 dspxbaralm 4 dspxbarerrcnt Cards ...

Страница 753: ...te the large number of errors in slot 12 Many of the errors are parity or CRC related but the one error that is most serious is loss of sync With a loss if sync between the service module and the switching fabric many other comparatively less significant errors are possible MGX8850 7 PXM a dspxbarerrcnt 7 2 MGX8850 System Rev 02 00 Aug 06 2000 17 47 53 GMT MGX8850 Node Alarm CRITICAL PXM45 CROSSBA...

Страница 754: ...chronization between the ASIC and the queuing circuitry on the service module The synchronization in this case applies to the timing of the internal switching frames Sframes Loss of synchronization is a very serious error Receiver code violations Rx Cv column in the display Receiver disparity errors Rx Disp column in the display A disparity error is a summary of five ASIC specific alarms Transmitt...

Страница 755: ...ecause the display can accommodate a finite number of errors without being distorted a K for 1000 and M for 1000000 multiplier may be necessary as this example shows MGX8850 7 PXM a dspxbarerrcnt 7 2 MGX8850 System Rev 02 00 Aug 06 2000 17 47 53 GMT MGX8850 Node Alarm CRITICAL PXM45 CROSSBAR CURRENT ERROR COUNTERS Crossbar Slot No 7 Switch ASIC No 2 Loss Rx Rx Xmit Hdr Pload Slot Slot BP Slot Sync...

Страница 756: ... the Alarm Count and is the highest number of errors that triggers an alarm of a particular severity The lower count is the Release Count when the number of errors drops below the Release Count the alarm severity drops to the next lower severity For example using the defaults shown in the example display if the number of transceiver errors drops below 40 a major alarm the alarm turns into a minor ...

Страница 757: ...JBP 2 Node Alarm MAJOR CROSSBAR ERROR CONFIGURATION Thresh MINOR MAJOR CRITICAL Device Error Time Clear Alarm Clear Alarm Clear Alarm Type msec Count Count Count Count Count Count LossOfSync 20000 0 3 4 15 300 301 TranscieverErr 20000 0 31 40 150 300 301 DisparityErr 20000 0 31 40 150 300 301 ParityErr 20000 300 301 300 301 300 301 HeaderCRCErr 20000 0 31 40 150 300 301 PayloadCRCErr 20000 0 31 40...

Страница 758: ... See the cnfxbarmgmt description for an explanation Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax dspxbarmgmt Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Related Commands cnfxbarmgmt Attributes Example Display the crossbar management state for the current node The settings are the defaults pop20two 7 PXM a dspxbarmgmt pop20two System Rev 02 01 Dec 05 2000 20 43 43 GMT MGX8850 Node Alarm MA...

Страница 759: ...he status of switch ASIC 0 The active PXM45 in this example is in slot 7 MGX8850 System Rev 02 00 Jul 13 2000 18 26 54 GMT MGX8850 Node Alarm UNKNOWN Switch CD No 7 Switch ASIC No 0 Administrative Status Bitmap 0xFFFFFFFF Operational Status Bitmap 0x0 Error Status Bitmap Slot 1 0x0 Slot 2 0x0 Slot 3 0x0 Slot 4 0x0 Slot 5 0x0 Slot 6 0x0 Slot 7 0x0 Slot 8 0x0 Slot 9 0x0 Slot 10 0x0 Slot 11 0x0 Slot ...

Страница 760: ...9 142 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Commands dspxbarstatus Misc Error Bitmap 0x0 ...

Страница 761: ...he first screen pop20two 7 PXM a dsplog log error50 07 00140 11 30 2000 23 10 59 SCM 4 RESP_TIMEOUT tSCM 0x80260d20 Timeout waiting for response for slot 9 report to PMM 07 00139 11 30 2000 23 10 20 CLI 7 CMDLOG tDbgCmdTsk 0x80377d9c cliCmdLog cisco console cnfname pop20two 07 00138 11 30 2000 23 10 20 PROO 6 soPRctcEvRcv PnProot 0x8068b894 proot_ctc_event_hdlr received EVENT 0x63 from CTC 07 0013...

Страница 762: ...s Statistics Halts the statistical diagnostic program that keeps count of how many times the diagnostics have run Syntax offdiagstat Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Related Commands ondiagstat Attributes Example pop20one 10 AXSM a offdiagstat Disabling diag stats enabling bucket stats Log log State active Privilege SERVICE_GP ...

Страница 763: ...tatistics Starts running the diagnostics statistics program that keeps count of how many times diagnostics has run Syntax ondiagstat Syntax Description This command takes no parameters Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Related Commands offdiagstat Attributes Example pop20one 10 AXSM a ondiagstat Enabling diag stats disabling bucket stats Log log State active Privilege SERVICE_GP ...

Страница 764: ...t level Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax pathtraceie portid rmv ins Syntax Description Related Commands conntrace pathtraceport pathracenode Attributes portid The portid represents the PNNI logical port and has the format shelf slot subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 9 3 rmv Allow to remove Trace Transit List IE at the port ins Allow to insert Trace Transit List IE at the ...

Страница 765: ...tracenode pathtracenode Path Trace Node Enables or disables path trace feature at the node level Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax pathtracenode enable disable Syntax Description Related Commands conntrace pathtraceport pathtraceie Attributes enable disable Enables disables path trace at node level Log log State active Privilege SUPER_GP ...

Страница 766: ...t subslot port subport See also PNNI Format page 9 3 enable disable Enables disables path trace at port level H Specifies the hierarchy option If enabled information from all the DTLs in the hierarchy are added in the TTL IE Default off CB Specifies the crankback option If enabled the failure cause for crankback is included in the TTL IE Default on V Specifies the VPI VCI option If enabled VPI VCI...

Страница 767: ...lated Commands conntrace pathracenode pathraceie Attributes Examples Format of the path trace result for a call in the log file Result Succ Fail Reason Desc Called No Calling No Cause value Desc NodeId Ingress Port Egress Port Vpi Vci Call Ref EndPtRef opt XXXX YYYY ZZZZ aaa bbb cccc dddd XXXX YYYY ZZZZ aaa bbb cccc dddd Log log State active Privilege SUPER_GP ...

Страница 768: ...have already been executed and that the card is identified in the command string Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax resetcd slot f Syntax Description Related Commands resetsys Attributes Example Reset the current PXM45 pinnacle 7 PXM a resetcd The card in slot number 7 will be reset Please confirm action Do you want to proceed Yes No n command not executed Reset the failure history of t...

Страница 769: ... Command Runs PXM45 Syntax resetsys Syntax Description This command takes no parameters but displays a warning and prompts you to continue the execution Related Commands resetcd Attributes Example Reset the system pinnacle 7 PXM a resetsys This command resets the entire shelf a destructive command Please confirm now Do you want to proceed Yes No n command not executed Log no log State active init ...

Страница 770: ...ou cannot execute switchcc during a configuration copy If you attempt it the system blocks the command Furthermore the command fails if the switch is unstable or if the standby PXM45 is not in the standby state Cards on Which This Command Runs PXM45 Syntax switchcc Related Commands None Attributes Example Attempt a switchcc without a standby PXM45 in the backplane raviraj 7 PXM a switchcc Do you w...

Страница 771: ...only the results of the test Note The dspcon fields on the AXSM for round trip delay including the status of OAM loopback always show the results of the latest test and are not changed until a new execution of tstconseg or tstdelay Therefore re executing dspcon does not clear the value for RTD or the indication that an OAM loopback is present The only way to reset these fields to null is to down t...

Страница 772: ...Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Commands tstconseg Example Test the integrity of 1 10 1000 in the egress direction node19 1 AXSM a tstconseg 1 10 100 Test started Use dspcon dspchantests to see test results ...

Страница 773: ...g the status of OAM loopback always show the results of the latest test and are not changed until a new execution of tstconseg or tstdelay Therefore re executing dspcon does not clear the value for RTD or the indication that an OAM loopback is present The only way to reset these fields to null is to down the port through dnport Note The primary purpose of tstdelay is to test the integrity of the c...

Страница 774: ...100 VCC ubr1 S 0000ebfb none 1 01 0011 00101 VCC ubr1 M 0000ec27 none Step 3 Execute tstdelay for logical port 1 vpi 10 vci 100 The system response shows that the command started correctly and directs you to use dspcon or dspchantests to see the results node19 1 AXSM a tstdelay 1 10 100 Test started Use dspcon dspchantests to see test results Step 4 Execute dspchantests to see the results as displ...

Страница 775: ...e SCR 3 Local CDV 1 Remote CDV 1 Local CTD 1 Remote CTD 1 Local MBS 1 Remote MBS 1 Local CDVT 1 Remote CDVT 1 Admin weight 1 Frame discard N OAM CC Config DISABLED Statistics DISABLED Loopback Type OAM Lpbk Dir ingress Status Success RTD 30000 us Port side Tx normal Swth side Tx normal Port side Rx normal Swth side Rx normal I AIS RDI E AIS RDI CONDITIONED CCFAIL IfFail Mismatch NO NO NO NO NO NO ...

Страница 776: ...he typical purpose of dncon is some form of operational modification or troubleshooting Execute upcon at the master end of the connection Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax upcon ifNum vpi vci Syntax Description Related Commands dncon Attributes ifNum The logical port number The range for AXSM is 1 60 vpi Virtual path identifier On the AXSM the range is 1 255 vci Virtual connection ident...

Страница 777: ...ine for SONET types T3 or E3 line signaling and so on Note See description of cnfcdsct for important planning considerations before you use upln Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax upln bay line Syntax Description Related Commands dspln dsplns cnfln dnln Attributes Example Activate line 1 in bay 1 MGX8850 1 AXSM a upln 1 1 bay line Identifies the bay 1 or 2 and the number of the line The ...

Страница 778: ...type After you re enable an NNI port through upport you cannot return the re routed connections to the upped port The PXM45 routes connections over the trunk as needed On a UNI the connections continue to exist but remain in the failed state until you enable the port by executing upport Cards on Which This Command Runs AXSM Syntax upport ifNum Syntax Description Related Commands dspport dspports d...

Страница 779: ...6 addpnni summary addr 5 12 addpnport 6 12 addport 3 15 addprfx 4 4 addred 3 18 addrscprtn 3 19 addslave xxvii addtrapmgr 2 9 adduser 2 10 aesa_ping 5 15 6 14 B bootChange 2 12 burnboot 2 14 bye 1 9 C cc 1 10 ccc xxv cd 1 11 Changed Commands xxvi checkflash xxv Cisco CD ROM xxi clidbxlevel 2 15 clrallcnf 2 16 9 9 clralm xxv clralmcnt xxv 9 10 clrbecnt xxv 3 21 9 11 clrcdcnt 9 12 clrchancnt 9 13 cl...

Страница 780: ...t 6 24 cnfifip xxvii cnfilmi 4 8 cnfilmienable 4 10 cnfilmiproto 4 12 cnfintfcongth 6 26 cnfln AXSM 3 29 cnfloginmsg xxv cnfmbsdft 7 29 cnfname 2 25 cnfndparms 2 26 cnfnodalcongth 6 28 cnfoamsegep 7 30 cnfpart 3 32 cnfpasswd xxv xxvi 2 30 cnfpasswdreset xxv cnfpnctlvc 6 31 cnfpnni election 5 18 cnfpnni intf 5 21 cnfpnni link selection 5 24 cnfpnni mtu 5 26 cnfpnni node 5 27 cnfpnni pkttrace 5 33 c...

Страница 781: ...pback xxv delpart 3 41 delpnni node xxv 5 51 delpnni summary addr xxv 5 52 delpnport 6 59 delpnportacc 6 60 delport 3 42 delprfx 4 15 delred 3 43 delrscprtn 3 44 delsesn xxv delsigdiag 6 61 deltrapmgr 2 42 deluser 2 43 disablesscop 6 63 dncon 7 34 9 48 dnilmi 4 16 dnlmi 3 45 dnln 3 46 9 49 dnpnport 6 64 dnport 3 47 9 50 downloadflash 2 44 dspabrtparmdft 7 35 dspactaudit xxv dspaddr 6 65 dspalm 9 5...

Страница 782: ...dr 4 18 dspilmicnt 4 19 9 110 dspilmis 4 20 dspintfcongcntr 6 71 dspintfcongflags 6 72 dspintfcongth 6 73 dspipconntask 2 56 dspipif 2 57 dspipifcache 2 59 dspln 3 75 9 111 dsplnbucketcnt xxvi dsplncnt 9 113 dsplnload xxvi dsplns 3 77 9 115 dspload 3 79 8 12 dsplog 9 117 dsploginmsg xxvi dsplogs 9 120 dsplpback xxvi dspmbsdft 7 47 dspndalms 9 121 dspnddebug xxvii dspndparms 2 60 dspnodalcongcntr 6...

Страница 783: ...ortsig 6 99 dsppnsysaddr 6 100 dspport 3 84 dspportcnt 9 125 dspportload xxvi dspports 3 86 dspportsct 3 87 dspprfhist 9 127 dspprfx 4 23 dsppswdreset xxvi dsppvcif 2 61 dsppwd xxvi dspred 3 94 dsprevs xxvi 2 63 dsprrtparm 8 16 dsprscprtn 3 95 dsprscprtns 3 97 dsprteoptcnf 8 17 dsprteoptstat 8 18 dspsct 3 98 dspserialif 2 66 dspsesn xxvi dspshelfalm xxvii dspsig 6 103 dspsigdiag 6 104 dspsigparm 6...

Страница 784: ... 144 ondiagstat 9 145 optrte 8 19 P passwd xxvi pathtraceie 9 146 pathtracenode 9 147 pathtraceport 9 148 ping 1 24 pvcifconfig 2 79 pwd 1 25 R Removed Commands xxvi resetcd 9 150 resetsys 2 81 9 151 restoreallcnf 2 82 routeShow 2 86 8 21 routestatShow 2 87 8 22 rrtcon 8 23 runrev 2 83 S saveallcnf 2 88 sesntimeout 2 100 setipconndebug 2 90 setrev 2 91 2 92 shutdisk xxvii smgrDataShow xxvi softswi...

Страница 785: ...ase 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 T telnet xxvi 2 98 timeout 2 100 tstconseg 9 153 tstdelay 9 155 tstpndelay 6 116 U upcon 7 56 9 158 uplmi xxvi 3 105 upln 3 106 9 159 uppnport 6 117 upport 3 107 7 57 9 160 users xxvi 2 101 W who 1 26 whoami 1 27 ...

Страница 786: ...Index IN 8 Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference Release 2 0 Part Number 78 10467 04 Rev C0 October 2001 ...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для MGX 8850

TDC Netopia User Manual preview
Netopia
Бренд: TDC Страницы: 27
iDirect Evolution X3 Installation And Safety Manual preview
Evolution X3
Бренд: iDirect Страницы: 60
Queclink GV600 Series Instruction Manual preview
GV600 Series
Бренд: Queclink Страницы: 9
Profile LS901-E1 Instruction Manual preview
LS901-E1
Бренд: Profile Страницы: 6
ANTAIRA LMP-1202M-SFP Series Quick Installation Manual preview
LMP-1202M-SFP Series
Бренд: ANTAIRA Страницы: 2
LevelOne FBR-1412TX User Manual preview
FBR-1412TX
Бренд: LevelOne Страницы: 83
Axis M31-L SERIES Installation Manual preview
M31-L SERIES
Бренд: Axis Страницы: 30
Multitech FaxFinder FF-120 Administrator User Manual preview
FaxFinder FF-120
Бренд: Multitech Страницы: 20
HeimVision HM243 User Manual preview
HM243
Бренд: HeimVision Страницы: 167
Billion BiPAC 8700VAX(L)-1600 User Manual preview
BiPAC 8700VAX(L)-1600
Бренд: Billion Страницы: 327
Crestron Zum Installation Manual preview
Zum
Бренд: Crestron Страницы: 2
A&D AD-4411 Instruction Manual preview
AD-4411
Бренд: A&D Страницы: 50
3Com Switch 5500G-EI PWR 48-Port Specifications preview
Switch 5500G-EI PWR 48-Port
Бренд: 3Com Страницы: 8
3Com 3C421600A Release Note preview
3C421600A
Бренд: 3Com Страницы: 10
Datavideo NVS-10 Instruction Manual preview
NVS-10
Бренд: Datavideo Страницы: 25
Eagle Eye DCPS-SHELF-9KW Operation Manual preview
DCPS-SHELF-9KW
Бренд: Eagle Eye Страницы: 61
on networks DSG005 Installation Manual preview
DSG005
Бренд: on networks Страницы: 8
EMC VNX Series Replacing Manual preview
VNX Series
Бренд: EMC Страницы: 51

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды